VigorSwitch G2100 - Switch Draytek - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	L2+ Managed Gigabit Switch
Ports	8 x 10/100/1000 Mbps RJ45 + 2 x 1000 Mbps SFP Combo
Management	Web UI, CLI (Telnet/SSH), SNMP v1/v2c/v3, TR-069
VLAN Support	802.1Q VLAN, up to 4094 VLANs, 12 active VLANs
QoS	802.1p, DSCP, Port-based, Queue scheduling
Link Aggregation	Static LAG and LACP (up to 4 groups)
Security	802.1X, RADIUS, TACACS+, ACL, Port Security, DHCP Snooping, Dynamic ARP Inspection
Multicast	IGMP Snooping, MLD Snooping, MVR
Energy Efficient Ethernet	IEEE 802.3az (Power saving)
Jumbo Frame	Up to 9 KB
MAC Address Table	8K entries
Dimensions (approx)	330 x 230 x 44 mm (19-inch rack mount)
Weight (approx)	2.2 kg
Power Supply	AC 100-240V, 50/60 Hz (internal, no PoE)
Power Consumption	Max 20 W (typical)
Cooling	Passive (no fan)
Operating Temperature	0°C to 50°C
Storage Temperature	-20°C to 70°C
Humidity	10% to 90% non-condensing
Warranty	2 years limited warranty
Package Contents	VigorSwitch G2100, power cord, quick start guide, console cable, rack mount kit, rubber feet

Frequently Asked Questions - VigorSwitch G2100 Draytek

How do I access the web management interface of the VigorSwitch G2100?

By default, the switch has IP address 192.168.1.224. Connect a PC to one of the LAN ports, set your PC to a static IP in the same subnet (e.g., 192.168.1.100), and open a browser to http://192.168.1.224. Login with username admin and password admin.

Does the VigorSwitch G2100 support PoE?

No, the G2100 model is a non-PoE switch. For PoE support, consider the VigorSwitch P2100 which provides IEEE 802.3af/at PoE+ on all 8 copper ports.

What management options are available?

The switch supports Web GUI (HTTP/HTTPS), CLI via Telnet/SSH, SNMP v1/v2c/v3, and TR-069 for remote management. It also has a console port for direct serial access.

How can I reset the switch to factory defaults?

Press and hold the RST button on the front panel for 5-20 seconds. The PoE/Alert and SYS LEDs will turn off to confirm the reset. Alternatively, use the web interface: System Maintenance > Factory Default.

What VLAN features does the switch support?

The switch supports 802.1Q VLAN with up to 4094 VLAN IDs and 12 active VLANs simultaneously. It also supports Voice VLAN, MAC VLAN, Protocol VLAN, and Surveillance VLAN for advanced traffic segmentation.

Can I aggregate multiple ports for higher bandwidth?

Yes, the switch supports Link Aggregation via static LAG or dynamic LACP (IEEE 802.3ad). Up to 4 LAG groups can be created, each combining up to 4 ports.

How do I configure port mirroring?

Go to Switch LAN > Mirror. You can create up to 4 mirror sessions. Select a destination port and choose which ports to mirror (RX, TX, or both). This is useful for network monitoring.

What security features are available?

Security features include 802.1X port authentication, RADIUS/TACACS+ for central authentication, ACL (Layer 2/3/4), Port Security (MAC limit), DHCP Snooping, Dynamic ARP Inspection, and DoS prevention.

Does the switch support IPv6?

Yes, the VigorSwitch G2100 supports IPv6 management and can be configured with a static IPv6 address or use SLAAC. It also supports MLD Snooping for IPv6 multicast.

What is the default login and how do I change it?

Default username and password are both admin. To change, log into the web interface, go to System Maintenance > Account Manager, and update the credentials. It is strongly recommended to change the default password.

USER MANUAL VigorSwitch G2100 Draytek

PoE L2+/L2+ Managed Switch

User's Guide

Version: 1.3

Firmware Version: V2.8.3

(For future update, please visit DrayTek web site)

Date: September 12, 2023

Copyrights

© All rights reserved. This publication contains information that is protected by copyright. No part may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language without written permission from the copyright holders.

Trademarks

The following trademarks are used in this document:

● Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corp.
● Windows 8, 10, 11 and Explorer are trademarks of Microsoft Corp.
● Apple and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
● Other products may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers.

Caution

Circuit devices are sensitive to static electricity, which can damage their delicate electronics. Dry weather conditions or walking across a carpeted floor may cause you to acquire a static electrical charge.

To protect your device, always:

• Touch the metal chassis of your computer to ground the static electrical charge before you pick up the circuit device.
• Pick up the device by holding it on the left and right edges only.

Warranty

We warrant to the original end user (purchaser) that the device will be free from any defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two (2) years from the date of purchase from the dealer. Please keep your purchase receipt in a safe place as it serves as proof of date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, we will, at our discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components, without charge for either parts or labor, to whatever extent we deem necessary tore-store the product to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal value, and will be offered solely at our discretion. This warranty will not apply if the product is modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. The warranty does not cover the bundled or licensed software of other vendors. Defects which do not significantly affect the usability of the product will not be covered by the warranty. We reserve the right to revise the manual and online documentation and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation to notify any person of such revision or changes.

Be a Registered Owner

Web registration is preferred. You can register your Vigor router via https://myvigor.draytek.com.

Firmware & Tools Updates

Due to the continuous evolution of DrayTek technology, all routers will be regularly upgraded. Please consult the DrayTek web site for more information on newest firmware, tools and documents.

More update, please visit www.draytek.com.

Table of Contents

Part I Introduction....1

I-1 Introduction ...... 2

I-1-1 Key Features .... 3
I-1-2 Specifications 3
I-1-3 Packing List 5
I-1-4 LED Indicators and Connectors .... 5

I-2 Installation....7

I-2-1 Network Connection .... 7
I-2-2 Rack-Mounted Installation....8
I-2-3 Connection via Console Cable 9
I-2-4 Typical Applications.... 12
I-2-5 Installing Network Cables 16
I-2-6 Configuring the Management Agent of Switch.... 16
I-2-7 Managing VigorSwitch through Ethernet Port 16
I-2-8 IP Address Assignment 17

I-3 Accessing Web Page of VigorSwitch 21
I-4 Dashboard.... 22
I-5 Status 23

I-5-1 Port Bandwidth Utilization 23
I-5-2 LLDP Statistics 23
I-5-3 GVRP Statistics....24
I-5-4 MLD Snooping Statistics 24
I-5-5 Port Statistics....25

Part II Switch LAN....27

II-1 General Setup 28

II-1-1 Management IP/VLAN 28

II-2 DHCP Server / Relay 30

II-2-1 DHCP Server.... 30

II-2-1-1 DHCP Server Settings....30
II-2-1-2 DHCP Server Options 31

II-2-2 Bind IP to MAC 33

II-2-3 DHCP Relay 34

II-2-3-1 Global Setting 34
II-2-3-2 Interface Setting....35

II-3 Port Setting 37

II-3-1 General Setting.... 37
II-3-2 Protected Ports.... 39

II-4 Mirror 40

II-5 Link Aggregation 41

II-5-1 LAG Setting 41

II-5-2 LAG Management 42

II-5-3 LAG Port Setting....43

II-5-4 LACP Setting 45

II-5-5 LACP Port Setting 46

II-6 VLAN Management....47

II-6-1 Create VLAN 47

II-6-2 Interface Settings.... 48

II-6-3 Voice VLAN 50

II-6-3-1 Properties 50

II-6-3-2 Telephony OUI Setting 51

II-6-3-3 Port Setting....52

II-6-4 MAC VLAN 53

II-6-4-1 MAC Group 53

II-6-4-3 Group Binding 54

II-6-5 Protocol VLAN 56

II-6-5-1 Protocol Group 56

II-6-5-2 Group Binding 57

II-6-6 Surveillance VLAN....59

II-6-6-1 Property 59

II-6-6-2 Surveillance OUI....59

II-6-6-3 Port Setting....60

II-6-7 GVRP 62

II-6-7-1 Property 62

II-6-7-2 Port Setting....62

II-6-7-3 Membership....64

II-7 EEE 65

II-8 Multicast....66

II-8-1 Properties 66

II-8-2 IGMP Snooping 67

II-8-2-1 IGMP Setting....67

II-8-2-2 IGMP Querier Setting....69

II-8-2-3 IGMP Static Group 70

II-8-2-4 IGMP Group Table....71

II-8-2-5 IGMP Router Table....72

II-8-2-6 Forward All 73

II-8-2-7 Throttling 74

II-8-2-8 Filtering Profile 75

II-8-2-9 Filtering Binding 76

II-8-3 MVR....78

II-8-3-1 Property 78

II-8-3-2 Port Setting....79

II-8-3-3 Group Address....80

II-8-4 MLD Snooping.... 82

II-7-4-1 MLD Setting 82

II-8-4-2 MLD Static Group 84

II-8-4-3 MLD Group Table....86

II-8-4-4 MLD Router Table....87

II-8-4-5 Forward All 88

II-8-4-6 Throttling 89

II-8-4-7 Filtering Profile....90

II-8-4-8 Filtering Binding 92

II-9 Jumbo Frame 93

II-10 STP 94

II-10-1 Properties 94

II-10-2 Port Setting....95

II-10-3 Bridge Setting 97

II-10-4 Port Advanced Setting....98

II-10-5 Statistics 99

II-10-6 MST Instance 100

II-10-7 MST Port Setting 101

II-11 MAC Address Table.... 103

II-11-1 Static MAC Setting 103

II-11-2 Dynamic Address Setting 104

II-11-3 L2 Table.... 104

II-11-3-1 All Mac Address 104

II-11-3-2 Dynamic Learned 105

II-12 Blocked Port Recover 106

Part III ONVIF Surveillance....107

III-1 Topology.... 108

III-1-1 Status 108

III-1-2 Throughput Threshold 113

III-2 Video....115

III-3 Device Maintenance ....116

III-3-1 General.... 116

III-3-2 Network 118

III-3-3 Security....120

Part IV VLAN Routing....121

IV-1 Property 122

IV-2 Interface Setting.... 123

IV-3 Static Route.... 124

Part V Security 125

V-1 RADIUS 126

V-2 TACACS+....128

V-3 Management Access Authentication.... 129

V-3-1 Method Profile 129

V-3-2 Application Authentication.... 130

V-4 Management Access Control.... 131

V-4-1 Management Access Control Profile (ACL) 131

V-4-2 Management Access Control Entries (ACE).... 132

V-5 802.1X/MAC Authentication.... 134

V-5-1 Properties.... 134

V-5-1-1 Global Settings.... 134

V-5-1-2 Port Authentication Setting.... 135

V-5-2 Port Control/Settings....136

V-5-3 MAC-Based Local Account.... 138

V-5-4 Authenticated Hosts.... 139

V-5-5 Accounting 140

V-6 Port Security 141

V-7 Storm Control 143

V-7-1 Properties.... 143

V-7-2 Port Setting 144

V-8 DoS 145

V-8-1 Properties.... 145

V-8-2 DoS Port Setting 147

V-9 Dynamic ARP Inspection 148

V-9-1 Properties.... 148

V-9-1-1 Global Property Settings 148

V-9-1-2 Per Port Property Settings 149

V-9-2 Statistics....150

V-10 DHCP Snooping.... 151

V-10-1 Properties.... 151

V-10-1-1 Global Property Settings.... 151

V-10-1-2 Per Port Property Settings.... 152

V-10-2 Statistics.... 153

V-10-3 Option82 Property 154

V-10-3-1 Global Option82 Property Settings 154

V-10-3-2 Per Port Option82 Property Settings.... 155

V-10-4 Option82 Circuit ID 156

V-11 IP Source Guard 157

V-11-1 Port Settings.... 157

V-11-2 IMPV Binding 158

V-12 IP Conflict Prevention 160

V-12-1 IP Conflict Detection.... 160

V-12-2 IP Conflict Prevention.... 160

V-13 Loop Protection.... 164

V-13-1 Global Property Settings 164

V-13-2 Per Port Settings.... 165

Part VI ACL Configuration....167

VI-1 Create ACL 168

VI-1-1 MAC 168

VI-1-2 IPv4 169

VI-1-3 IPv6 170

VI-2 Create ACE....171

VI-2-1 MAC 171

VI-2-2 IPv4 172

VI-2-3 IPv6 175

VI-3 ACL Binding 177

Part VII QoS Configuration....179

VII-1 General 180

VII-1-1 Properties.... 180

VII-1-1-1 QoS General Setting 180

VII-1-1-2 Trust Ports.... 181

VII-1-2 Port Settings.... 182

VII-1-3 Queue Settings 183

VII-1-4 CoS Mapping 184

IX-1 Certificate Management 198

Part X System Maintenance....199

X-1 TR-069 200

X-2 OpenVPN.... 202

X-3 Webhook....203

X-4 LLDP 204

X-4-1 Properties....204

X-4-2 LLDP Port Setting 205

X-4-3 LLDP Local Device....206

X-4-4 MED Network Policy 207

X-4-5 LLDP MED Port Settings 208

X-4-6 LLDP Remote Device....209

X-4-7 LLDP Overloading....210

X-5 SNMP 211

X-5-1 View....212

X-5-2 Group 213

X-5-3 Community 214

X-5-4 User....216

X-5-5 Engine ID 219

X-5-5-1 Local Engine ID 219

X-5-5-2 Remote Engine ID 220

X-5-6 Trap Event....221

X-5-7 Notification 222

X-6 Access Manager 224

X-7 CLI Session Manager 225

X-8 Time and Date 226

X-8-1 System Time Zone 226

X-8-2 Time 227

X-9 Backup Manager....228

X-10 Upgrade Manager....229

X-11 Account Manager 230

X-12 Factory Default 231

X-13 Reboot Switch....232

Part XI Diagnostics....233

XI-1 Device Check.... 234

XI-2 Cable Diagnostics.... 235

XI-3 SFP Vendor Info 236

XI-4 Ping Test 237

XI-5 DHCP Table 238

XI-6 SysLog....239

XI-6-1 SysLog Explorer 239

XI-6-2 SysLog Settings 240

XI-6-2-1 SysLog Service 240

XI-6-2-2 Local SysLog 241

XI-6-2-3 Remote SysLog 242

XI-6-2-4 SysLog Mail 243

XI-7 Route Table....244

Part XII Mail Alert ....245

XII-1 Alert Setting 246

Part XIII Telnet Commands....249

XIII-1 Accessing Telnet of VigorSwitch 250

XIII-2 Available Commands.... 252

XIII-2-1 Clear Configuration 252

XIII-2-2 Clock Configuration.... 261

XIII-2-3 Configure Configuration 262

XIII-2-4 Copy Configuration 351

XIII-2-5 Delete Configuration 352

XIII-2-6 Disable Configuration....353

XIII-2-7 End Configuration 353

XIII-2-8 Exit Configuration.... 353

XIII-2-9 Hardware-Monitor Configuration.... 354

XIII-2-10 Ping Configuration.... 354

XIII-2-11 Reboot Configuration 355

XIII-2-12 Renew Configuration 355

XIII-2-13 Restore-defaults Configuration 355

XIII-2-14 Save Configuration.... 356

XIII-2-15 Show Configuration.... 356

XIII-2-16 SSL Configuration 356

XIII-2-17 Terminal Configuration.... 358

XIII-2-18 Traceroute Configuration 358

XIII-2-19 UDLD Configuration 359

Appendix: Reference....361

A-1 What's the Ethernet.... 361

A-2 Media Access Control (MAC) 364

A-3 Flow Control.... 368

Part I Introduction

I-1 Introduction

VigorSwitch P2100/ G2100, 8 Ports L2+ Managed Gigabit Switch, is a standard switch that meets all IEEE 802.3/ u/ x/ z Gigabit, Fast Ethernet specifications. The switch has 8 10/ 100/ 1000Mbps TP ports. It supports telnet, http, https, SSH and SNMP interface for switch management. The network administrator can login the switch to monitor, configure and control each port's activity. In addition, the switch implements the QoS (Quality of Service), VLAN, and Trunking. It is suitable for office application.

graph LR
    A["Internet"] --> B["Vigor Router"]
    B --> C["VLAN 1"]
    C --> D["VLAN 2"]
    D --> E["VigorSwitch"]
    E --> F["VLAN 1"]
    E --> G["VLAN 2"]
    E --> H["VLAN 1"]
    style A fill:#cce5ff,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#e6f7ff,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#e6f7ff,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#e6f7ff,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#e6f7ff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#e6f7ff,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#e6f7ff,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#e6f7ff,stroke:#333

Vigor switch supports IEEE 802.3az, Energy-Efficient Ethernet, and provides power saving feature. It can efficiently save the switch power with auto detect the client idle and cable length to provide different power.

1000Mbps SFP Fiber port fully complies with all IEEE 802.3z and 1000Base-SX/LX standards.

graph TD
    A["Head Office"] --> B["Vigor Router Series"]
    B --> C["Router"]
    C --> D["IT Dept. (VLAN 10)"]
    C --> E["Finance Dept. (VLAN 20)"]
    C --> F["Sales Dept. (VLAN 30)"]
    B --> G["Internet"]
    G --> H["Warehouse (VLAN 40)"]
    H --> I["Fiber Trunking"]
    I --> C
    C --> J["POE"]
    J --> K["Computer"]
    C --> L["PoE"]
    L --> M["Computer"]
    C --> N["POE"]
    N --> O["Computer"]

I-1-1 Key Features

Below shows key features of this device:

QoS

The switch offers powerful QoS function. This function supports 802.1p VLAN tag priority and DSCP on Layer 3 of network framework.

VLAN

Support 12 active VLANs and VLAN ID 1\~4094.

Port Trunking

Allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a Link Aggregation Group by the static setting.

Power Saving (for P210 0)

The Power saving using the IEEE 802.3az, Energy-Efficient Ethernet to detect the client idle and cable length automatically and provides the different power. It could efficient to save the switch power and reduce the power consumption.

I-1-2 Specifications

The VigorSwitch P/ G2100, a standalone off-the-shelf switch, provides the comprehensive features listed below for users to perform system network administration and efficiently and securely serve your network.

Hardware

8 10/100/1000Mbps Auto-negotiation Gigabit Ethernet TP ports with PoE+
❖ Jumbo frame support 9KB
◆ 4 UTP/ SFP Combo Ethernet Ports
❖ Programmable classifier for QoS (Layer 2/ Layer 3)
✿ 8K MAC address and support VLAN ID(1\~4094)
❖ Per-port shaping, policing, and Broadcast Storm Control
Power Saving with IEEE 802.3az, Energy-Efficient Ethernet
Full-duplex flow control (IEEE802.3x) and half-duplex backpressure
◆ Extensive front-panel diagnostic LEDs; Power, System, PoE fail and PoE/link activity
Hardware reset button for resetting configuration to factory default by pressing over 5 seconds

Management

◆ Supports per port traffic monitoring counters
◆ Supports a snapshot of the system Information when you login
◆ Supports port mirror function

◆ Supports the static trunk function
◆ Supports 802.1Q VLAN
❖ Supports user management and limits three users to login
Maximal packet length can be up to 9600 bytes for jumbo frame application
◆ Supports Broadcasting Suppression to avoid network suspended or crashed
◆ Supports to send the trap event while monitored events happened
✿ Supports default configuration which can be restored to overwrite the current configuration which is working on via Web UI and Reset button of the switch
◆ Supports on-line plug/ unplug SFP modules
✿ Supports Quality of Service (QoS) for real time applications based on the information taken from Layer 2 to Layer 3
Built-in web-based management and CLI management, providing a more convenient UI for the user

I-1-3 Packing List

Before you start installing the switch, verify that the package contains the following:

AC Power Cord
◆ Quick Start Guide
Rubber feet
Rack mount kit
Console Cable

VigorSwitch P2100/ G2100

Please notify your sales representative immediately if any of the aforementioned items is missing or damaged.

I-1-4 LED Indicators and Connectors

Before you use the Vigor device, please get acquainted with the LED indicators and connectors first. There are 8 Ethernet ports and SFP ports on the front panel of the switch. LED display area, locating on the front panel, contains an ACT, Power LED and ports working status of the switch.

LED	Status	Explanation
PoE	On (Green) Devices connected over the PoE maximum power budget.
	Blinking (Green)	More than 80% of maximum power budget is supplied for PoE device(s).
	Off Devices connected within the PoE maximum power budget.
RJ 45	On (Green) The device is connected with 1000Mbps.
LNK/ ACTPort 1 ~ 8	On (Amber) The device is connected with 10/ 100Mbps.
	Blinking The system is sending or receiving data through the port.
	Off The port is disconnected or the link is failed.
Port 9 ~ 10SFP LNK/ ACT	On (Green) The device is connected with 1000Mbps.
	On (Amber) The device is connected with 10/ 100Mbps.
	Blinking The system is sending or receiving data through the port.
	Off The port is disconnected or the link is failed.
SYS	On (Green)	The switch finishes system booting and the system is ready.
	Blinking (Green)	The switch is powered on and starts system booting.
	Off	The power is off or the system is not ready / malfunctioning.
PWR	On The device is powered on.
	Off The device is powered off.

Connector Explanation

Interface		Description
RJ 45 LNK/ ACT Port 1 ~ 8		Port 1 to Port 8 can be used for Ethernet connection and PoE connection.
PoE for Port 1 ~ 8 (P2100)
Console		Used to perform telnet command control.
SFP LNK/ ACT Port 9 ~ 10		Port 9 to Port 10 are used for fiber connection.
RST		Factory reset button.Press it to reboot the system. (<5 seconds) The PoE/ Alert and SYS LEDs will blink too.Press it to reset the system with factory default settings. (5~20 seconds)The PoE/ Alert and SYS LEDs will be off if RST button is pressed between 5 seconds and 10 seconds.
		Power inlet for AC input (100~240V/ AC, 50/ 60Hz).

Note:

Power Output for P2100 -

• IEEE 802.3af Max. 15.4W Output Supported
• IEEE 802.3at Max. 30W Output Supported

PoE Power Budget for P2100 -

● 140 Watts

I-2 Installation

I-2-1 Network Connection

• Use a Cat. 5e twisted-pair cable to connect a PoE device to the port (1\~8) of this switch.
  ● The switch will supply power to PoE Device over the twisted-pair cable.
• Please note that Power Device must comply with IEEE 802.3af/ at.
• Other PCs, servers and network devices can be connected to the switch using a standard 'straight through' twisted pair cable.

P2100

graph TD
    A["Non-PoE Device"] --> B["PC"]
    A --> C["Router"]
    A --> D["Printer"]
    A --> E["NB"]
    F["PoE Device"] --> G["IP Phone"]
    F --> H["IP Camera"]
    F --> I["AP"]
    F --> J["IP Camera"]
    B <--> K["Router"]
    K --> L["1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1"]
    G --> H
    H --> I
    I --> J

G2100

graph TD
    A["Non-PoE Device"] --> B["PC"]
    A --> C["Router"]
    A --> D["Printer"]
    A --> E["NB"]
    F["VigorSwitch L2 - Monogel"] --> G["Network Port 1"]
    F --> H["Network Port 2"]
    F --> I["Network Port 3"]
    F --> J["Network Port 4"]
    F --> K["Network Port 5"]

I-2-2 Rack-Mounted Installation

The switch can be installed easily by using rack mount kit.

1. Attach the brackets to the chassis of a 19-inch rack. The second bracket attaches the other side of the chassis as above procedure.

Two identical line drawings of a 3D L-shaped metal bracket with mounting holes (no text or symbols)

1. After the bracket installation, the VigorSwitch's chassis can be installed in a rack by using four screws for each side of the rack.

Illustration of two VigoSwitch network switches with ports and connectors, shown from side to top (no text or symbols on the devices themselves)

I-2-3 Connection via Console Cable

You can perform debugging, configuration and firmware upgrade, through the console connection.

To connect VigorSwitch to a PC via console cable, please

1. Connect the RJ45 connector of console cable to the console port on Vigor device.
2. Connect the DB9 connector of the console cable to the RS232 port on the PC.

To connect VigorSwitch to a notebook, please

1. Connect the DB9 connector of the console cable to the DB9 connector of USB to RS232 cable first.
2. Connect the RJ45 connector of console cable into the Console Port of the switch.
3. Connect the USB connector to the USB port of the notebook.

Console Port Configuration

1. Open Hyper Terminal on the PC.

2. Open the following dialog to configure COM1 Properties as

Baud rate: 115200

Data bits: 8

Stop bits: 1

Parity: None

Flow control: None

Or, you can make configuration via PuTTY utility.

1. Make sure the PuTTY utility has been installed on your PC. Execute PuTTY.

2. Configure the settings as the following figures. The default settings of the console port are:

Baud rate: 115200

Data bits: 8

Stop bits: 1

Parity: None

Flow control: None

1. Click Open. The default login is:

Username: admin

Password: admin

I-2-4 Typical Applications

The VigorSwitch implements 8 Gigabit Ethernet TP ports with auto MDIX and four slots for the removable module supporting comprehensive fiber types of connection, including LC and BiDi-LC SFP modules. The switch is suitable for the following applications:

Case 1: All switch ports are in the same local area network.

Every port can access each other. (*The switch image is sample only.)

If VLAN is enabled and configured, each node in the network that can communicate each other directly is bounded in the same VLAN area.

Here VLAN area is defined by what VLAN you are using. The switch supports both port-based VLAN and tag-based VLAN. They are different in practical deployment, especially in physical location. The following diagram shows how it works and what the difference they are.

Case 2: The same VLAN members can be at different switches with the same VID

graph TD
    A["Switch 1"] --> B["Computer"]
    C["Switch 2"] --> D["Computer"]
    E["Switch 3"] --> F["Computer"]
    B --> G["VLAN1"]
    D --> H["VLAN2"]
    F --> I["VLAN3"]

Case 3: Desktop Installation

1. Install the switch on a level surface that can support the weight of the unit and the relevant components.
2. Plug the switch with the female end of the provided power cord and plug the male end to the power outlet.

Case 4: Rack-mount Installation

The switch may be standalone, or mounted in a rack. Rack mounting facilitate to an orderly installation when you are going to install series of networking devices.

Procedures to Rack-mount the switch:

1. Disconnect all the cables from the switch before continuing.
2. Place the unit the right way up on a hard, flat surface with the front facing you.
3. Locate a mounting bracket over the mounting holes on one side of the unit.
4. Insert the screws and fully tighten with a suitable screwdriver.
5. Repeat the two previous steps for the other side of the unit.

6. Insert the unit into the rack and secure with suitable screws.

7. Reconnect all the cables.

Case 5: Central Site/Remote site application is used in carrier or ISP

graph TD
    A["Copper Twisted-pair"] --> B["Converter Chassis"]
    C["Managed Media Converter"] --> B
    D["Managed Media Converter"] --> B
    B --> E["mm or sm fiber"]
    F["Copper Twisted-pair Links"] -.-> G["Fiber Optic"]
    H["Fiber Optic"] --> I["Fiber Optic"]
    J["Fiber Optic"] --> K["Fiber Optic"]
    L["Fiber Optic"] --> M["Fiber Optic"]
    N["Fiber Optic"] --> O["Fiber Optic"]
    P["Fiber Optic"] --> Q["Fiber Optic"]
    R["Fiber Optic"] --> S["Fiber Optic"]
    T["Fiber Optic"] --> U["Fiber Optic"]
    V["Fiber Optic"] --> W["Fiber Optic"]
    X["Fiber Optic"] --> Y["Fiber Optic"]
    Z["Fiber Optic"] --> AA["Fiber Optic"]
    AB["Fiber Optic"] --> AC["Fiber Optic"]
    AD["Fiber Optic"] --> AE["Fiber Optic"]
    AF["Fiber Optic"] --> AG["Fiber Optic"]
    AH["Fiber Optic"] --> AI["Fiber Optic"]
    AJ["Fiber Optic"] --> AK["Fiber Optic"]
    AL["Fiber Optic"] --> AM["Fiber Optic"]
    AN["Fiber Optic"] --> AO["Fiber Optic"]
    AP["Fiber Optic"] --> AQ["Fiber Optic"]
    AR["Fiber Optic"] --> AS["Fiber Optic"]
    AT["Fiber Optic"] --> AU["Fiber Optic"]
    AV["Fiber Optic"] --> AW["Fiber Optic"]
    AX["Fiber Optic"] --> AY["Fiber Optic"]
    AZ["Fiber Optic"] --> BA["Fiber Optic"]
    BB["Fiber Optic"] --> BC["Fiber Optic"]
    BD["Fiber Optic"] --> BE["Fiber Optic"]
    BF["Fiber Optic"] --> BG["Fiber Optic"]
    BH["Fiber Optic"] --> BI["Fiber Optic"]
    BJ["Fiber Optic"] --> BK["Fiber Optic"]
    BL["Fiber Optic"] --> BM["Fiber Optic"]
    BN["Fiber Optic"] --> BO["Fiber Optic"]
    BP["Fiber Optic"] --> BQ["Fiber Optic"]
    BR["Fiber Optic"] --> BS["Fiber Optic"]
    BT["Fiber Optic"] --> BU["Fiber Optic"]
    BV["Fiber Optic"] --> BW["Fiber Optic"]
    BX["Fiber Optic"] --> BY["Fiber Optic"]
    ZQ["Fiber Optic"] --> BRQ["Fiber Optic"]

Case 6: Peer-to-peer application is used in two remote offices

graph TD
    A["Server"] --> B["Client 1"]
    A --> C["Client 2"]
    A --> D["Client 3"]
    A --> E["Client 4"]
    A --> F["Client 5"]
    A --> G["Client 6"]
    A --> H["Client 7"]
    A --> I["Client 8"]
    A --> J["Client 9"]
    A --> K["Client 10"]
    A --> L["Client 11"]
    A --> M["Client 12"]
    A --> N["Client 13"]
    A --> O["Client 14"]
    A --> P["Client 15"]
    A --> Q["Client 16"]
    A --> R["Client 17"]
    A --> S["Client 18"]
    A --> T["Client 19"]
    A --> U["Client 20"]
    A --> V["Client 21"]
    A --> W["Client 22"]
    A --> X["Client 23"]
    A --> Y["Client 24"]
    A --> Z["Client 25"]
    A --> AA["Client 26"]
    A --> AB["Client 27"]
    A --> AC["Client 28"]
    A --> AD["Client 29"]
    A --> AE["Client 30"]
    A --> AF["Client 31"]
    A --> AG["Client 32"]
    A --> AH["Client 33"]
    A --> AI["Client 34"]
    A --> AJ["Client 35"]
    A --> AK["Client 36"]
    A --> AL["Client 37"]
    A --> AM["Client 38"]
    A --> AN["Client 39"]
    A --> AO["Client 40"]
    A --> AP["Client 41"]
    A --> AQ["Client 42"]
    A --> AR["Client 43"]
    A --> AS["Client 44"]
    A --> AT["Client 45"]
    A --> AU["Client 46"]
    A --> AV["Client 47"]
    A --> AW["Client 48"]
    A --> AX["Client 49"]
    A --> AY["Client 50"]
    A --> AZ["Client 51"]
    A --> BA["Client 52"]
    A --> BB["Client 53"]
    A --> BC["Client 54"]
    A --> BD["Client 55"]
    A --> BE["Client 56"]
    A --> BF["Client 57"]
    A --> BG["Client 58"]
    A --> BH["Client 59"]
    A --> BI["Client 60"]
    A --> BJ["Client 61"]
    A --> BK["Client 62"]
    A --> BL["Client 63"]
    A --> BM["Client 64"]
    A --> BN["Client 65"]
    A --> BO["Client 66"]
    A --> BP["Client 67"]
    A --> BQ["Client 68"]
    A --> BR["Client 69"]
    A --> BS["Client 70"]
    A --> BT["Client 71"]
    A --> BU["Client 72"]
    A --> BV["Client 73"]
    A --> BW["Client 74"]
    A --> BX["Client 75"]
    A --> BY["Client 76"]
    A --> BZ["Client 77"]
    A --> CA["Client 78"]
    A --> CB["Client 79"]
    A --> CC["Client 80"]
    A --> CY["Client 81"]
    A --> CZ["Client 82"]
    A --> DA["Client 83"]
    A --> DB["Client 84"]
    A --> DC["Client 85"]
    A --> DY["Client 86"]
    A --> DYB["Client 87"]

Case 7: Office network

graph TD
    subgraph R&D
        A["Computer 1"] --> B["Switch"]
        C["Computer 2"] --> B
        D["Computer 3"] --> B
        B --> E["Switch"]
    end
    subgraph Sales
        F["Computer 1"] --> G["Switch"]
        H["Computer 2"] --> G
        I["Computer 3"] --> G
        G --> J["Switch"]
    end
    subgraph Financial
        K["Computer 1"] --> L["Switch"]
        M["Computer 2"] --> L
        N["Computer 3"] --> L
        L --> O["Switch"]
    end
    subgraph MIS
        P["Computer 1"] --> Q["Switch"]
        R["Computer 2"] --> Q
        S["Computer 3"] --> Q
        Q --> T["Switch"]
    end

I-2-5 Installing Network Cables

Crossover or straight-through cable: All the ports on the switch support Auto-MDI/ MDI-X functionality. Both straight-through or crossover cables can be used as the media to connect the switch with PCs as well as other devices like switches, hubs or router.

Category 3, 4, 5 or 5e, 6 UTP/STP cable: To make a valid connection and obtain the optimal performance, an appropriate cable that corresponds to different transmitting/receiving speed is required. To choose a suitable cable, please refer to the following table.

Media	Speed	Wiring
10/100/1000 Mbps copper	10 Mbps Category 3,4,5 UTP/ STP
	100Mbps Category 5 UTP/ STP
	1000 Mbps Category 5e, 6 UTP/ STP

I-2-6 Configuring the Management Agent of Switch

Users can monitor and configure the switch through Ethernet port, includes Web-UI and SNMP.

VigorSwitch, for example:

IP Address: 192.168.1.224

Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway: 192.168.1.254

I-2-7 Managing VigorSwitch through Ethernet Port

Before start using the switch, the IP address setting of the switch should be done, then perform the following steps:

1. Set up a physical path between the configured the switch and a PC by a qualified UTP Cat. 5e cable with RJ-45 connector.

Note: If PC directly connects to the switch, you have to setup the same subnet mask between them. But, subnet mask may be different for the PC in the remote site. Please refer to the above figure about the Web Smart Switch default IP address information.

1. After configuring correct IP address on your PC, open your web browser and access switch's IP address.

I-2-8 IP Address Assignment

For IP address configuration, there are three parameters needed to be filled in. They are IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and DNS.

IP address:

The address of the network device in the network is used for internetworking communication. Its address structure looks is shown below. It is “classful” because it is split into predefined address classes or categories.

Each class has its own network range between the network identifier and host identifier in the 32 bits address. Each IP address comprises two parts: network identifier (address) and host identifier (address). The former indicates the network where the addressed host resides, and the latter indicates the individual host in the network which the address of host refers to. And the host identifier must be unique in the same LAN. Here the term of IP address we used is version 4, known as IPv4.

With the classful addressing, it divides IP address into three classes, class A, class B and class C. The rest of IP addresses are for multicast and broadcast. The bit length of the network prefix is the same as that of the subnet mask and is denoted as IP address/X, for example, 192.168.1.0/24. Each class has its address range described below.

Class A:

Address is less than 126.255.255.255. There are a total of 126 networks can be defined because the address 0.0.0.0 is reserved for default route and 127.0.0.0/8 is reserved for loopback function.

Class B:

IP address range between 128.0.0.0 and 191.255.255.255. Each class B network has a 16-bit network prefix followed 16-bit host address. There are 16,384 (2^14)/16 networks able to be defined with a maximum of 65534 (2^16 -2) hosts per network.

Class C:

IP address range between 192.0.0.0 and 223.255.255.255. Each class C network has a 24-bit network prefix followed 8-bit host address. There are 2,097,152 (2^21)/24 networks able to be defined with a maximum of 254 (2^8 -2) hosts per network.

Bit#0123

23 24 31

110

Network address

Host address

Class D and E:

Class D is a class with first 4 MSB (Most significance bit) set to 1-1-1-0 and is used for IP Multicast. See also RFC 1112. Class E is a class with first 4 MSB set to 1-1-1-1 and is used for IP broadcast.

According to IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority), there are three specific IP address blocks reserved and able to be used for extending internal network. We call it Private IP address and list below:

Class A 10.0.0.0 ---	10.255.255.255
Class B 172.16.0.0 ---	172.31.255.255
Class C 192.168.0.0 ---	192.168.255.255

Please refer to RFC 1597 and RFC 1466 for more information.

Subnet mask:

It means the sub-division of a class-based network or a CIDR block. The subnet is used to determine how to split an IP address to the network prefix and the host address in bitwise basis. It is designed to utilize IP address more efficiently and ease to manage IP network.

For a class B network, 128.1.2.3, it may have a subnet mask 255.255.0.0 in default, in which the first two bytes is with all 1s. This means more than 60 thousands of nodes in flat IP address will be at the same network. It's too large to manage practically. Now if we divide it into smaller network by extending network prefix from 16 bits to, say 24 bits, that's using its third byte to subnet this class B network. Now it has a subnet mask 255.255.255.0, in which each bit of the first three bytes is 1. It's now clear that the first two bytes is used to identify the class B network, the third byte is used to identify the subnet within this class B network and, of course, the last byte is the host number.

Not all IP address is available in the sub-netted network. Two special addresses are reserved. They are the addresses with all zero's and all one's host number. For example, an IP address 128.1.2.128, what IP address reserved will be looked like? All 0s mean the network itself, and all 1s mean IP broadcast.

128.1.2.128/25

In this diagram, you can see the subnet mask with 25-bit long, 255.255.255.128, contains 126 members in the sub-netted network. Another is that the length of network prefix equals the number of the bit with 1s in that subnet mask. With this, you can easily count the number of IP addresses matched. The following table shows the result.

Prefix Length No. of IP matched No. of Addressable IP

/32	1		-
/31	2		-
/30	4		2
/29	8		6
/28	16		14
/27	32		30
/26	64		62
/25	128		126
/24	256		254
/23	512		510
/22	1024	1022
/21	2048	2046
/20	4096	4094
/19	8192	8190
/18	16384	16382
/17	32768	32766
/16	65536	65534

According to the scheme above, a subnet mask 255.255.255.0 will partition a network with the class C. It means there will have a maximum of 254 effective nodes existed in this sub-netted network and is considered a physical network in an autonomous network. So it owns a network IP address which may looks like 168.1.2.0.

With the subnet mask, a bigger network can be cut into small pieces of network. If we want to have more than two independent networks in a worknet, a partition to the network must be performed. In this case, subnet mask must be applied.

For different network applications, the subnet mask may look like 255.255.255.240. This means it is a small network accommodating a maximum of 15 nodes in the network.

For assigning an IP address to the switch, you just have to check what the IP address of the network will be connected with the switch. Use the same network address and append your host address to it.

First, IP Address: as shown above, enter "192.168.1.224", for instance. For sure, an IP address such as 192.168.1.x must be set on your PC.
Second, Subnet Mask: as shown above, enter "255.255.255.0". Choose a subnet mask suitable for your network.

Note: The DHCP Setting is enabled in default. Therefore, if a DHCP server presented on network connected to the switch, check before accessing your switch is essential.

I-3 Accessing Web Page of VigorSwitch

1. Open any browser (e.g., Firefox) and type "192.168.1.224" as URL.

2. Please type "admin/ admin" as the Username/ Password and click Login. Take VigorSwitch P2100 as an example.

1. Now, the Main Screen will appear.

Info

The DHCP Setting is enabled in default. Therefore, if a DHCP server presented on network connected to VigorSwitch, checking before accessing VigorSwitch is essential.

I-4 Dashboard

Click Dashboard from the main menu on the left side of the main page.

A web page with default selections will be displayed on the screen. Refer to the following figure:

I-5 Status

I-5-1 Port Bandwidth Utilization

This page offers the traffic statistics including data information and data of interframe gap for each port (GE1 to GE10). In which, data of interframe gap can be displayed or hidden by choose Enable / Disable for IFG.

I-5-2 LLDP Statistics

This page offers the statistics of LLDP packets (in, out and error) of each port (GE1 to GE10).

I-5-3 GVRP Statistics

GVRP (Generic Attribute Registration Protocol) is used automatically for exchanging information for VLAN membership between switches. This page counts the GVRP information received on each port.

I-5-4 MLD Snooping Statistics

This page counts the MLD messages received or transmitted on the network.

I-5-5 Port Statistics

This page displays statistics for GE/LG ports.

Click the icon to open advanced port statistics information.

This page is left blank.

Part II Switch LAN

II-1 General Setup

General setup is used to configure settings for the switch network interface and offers how the switch connects to a remote server to get services.

II-1-1 Management IP/VLAN

The switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network. The factory default IP address is 192.168.1.224. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. The factory default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.

Use the IPv6 Address (IPv4/ IPv6) screen to configure the switch IPv6 address and the default gateway device. The gateway field specifies the IPv6 address of the gateway (next hop) for outgoing traffic. In addition, this page allows the network administrator to change the VLAN ID of management access. Management access protocols such as http, https, SNMP and etc., are only accessible from the VLAN specified as management VLAN.

Info

If VigorSwitch has connected to Vigor router, it will use the IP address obtained from the DHCP server on Vigor router. Thus, the user must type the assigned IP as URL for accessing into the web user interface of VigorSwitch. If not, 192.168.1.224 shall be the default IP.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
IPv4
Mode Select the mode of network connection. Static- Use static IPv4 address. DHCP - Use DHCP provisioned IP address and Gateway if feasible.
IP Address	It is available when Static is selected as Mode. Enter the IP address of your switch in dotted decimal notationfor example 192.168.1.224. If static mode is enabled, enter IP address in this field.
Subnet Mask	It is available when Static is selected as Mode.Enter the IP subnet mask of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example 255.255.255.0. If static mode is enabled, enter subnet mask in this field.
Gateway	It is available when Static is selected as Mode.Enter the IP address of the gateway in dotted decimal notation. If static mode is enabled, enter gateway address in this field.
DNS Server 1	It is available when Static is selected as Mode.If static mode is enabled, enter primary DNS server address in this field.
DNS Server 2	It is available when Static is selected as Mode.If static mode is enabled, enter secondary DNS server address in this field.
IPv6
Auto Configuration Enable	- Check it to let switch automatically configure IPv6 address.
IPv6 Address	It is available when Auto Configuration is set as Disable.Enter the IPv6 address of your switch. If auto configuration mode is disabled, enter IPv6 address in this field.
Link Local Address Display	link local address.
Gateway	It is available when Auto Configuration is set as Disable.Enter the IPv6 address of the router as your default IPv6 gateway to access IPv6 Internet or other IPv6 network.
DHCPv6 Client	It is available when Auto Configuration is set as Enable.Enable this feature if there is a DHCPv6 server on your network for assigning IPv6 Address, instead of using Router Advertisement.
Management VLAN
Management VLAN	Select the VLAN ID as management VLAN. You can create additional VLAN profiles by Switch LAN>>VLANmanagement>> Create VLAN.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

II-2 DHCP Server / Relay

II-2-1 DHCP Server

II-2-1-1 DHCP Server Settings

VigorSwitch can be configured as a DHCP server to assign IP address(es) for every device connecting via LAN port.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
DHCP Server Status Display the DHCP server status.
Interface(VID) Select an interface (VID).If nothing to be selected, create a new one from VLAN Routing>>Interface Setting.
Mode	Disable Server - Click to disable the DHCP server.Enable Server - Click to enable the DHCP server. VigorSwitch can assign IP address to the device connecting with LAN port.
IP Address	Display the IP address specified for the selected interface (VID).
Subnet Mask Display the mask address specified for the selected interface.
Start IP Address Enter the starting point for the DHCP server to assign IP address for the device connected.
IP Pool Counts The maximum number (1~1021) of IP addresses to be handed out by DHCP.
Lease Time Option The maximum duration DHCP-issued IP addresses can be used before they have to be renewed.Infinity - It means no limitation.Set Time - If selected, a time period should be set.
Lease Time	Set the time value if Set time is selected as Lease Time Option.
Gateway Enter the IP address of the gateway, which is the host on the LAN that relays all traffic coming into and going out of the LAN.
DNS Server 1/2 Enter the primary / secondary DNS server.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
DHCP Server Status Displays the IP assignment status.

II-2-1-2 DHCP Server Options

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Interface(VID) Select an interface (VID).If nothing to be selected, create a new one from VLAN Routing>>Interface Setting.
Enable Option Enable - Click to enable the function of DHCP server option for the interface.Disable - Click to disable the function.
Option Number Select an option number (e.g., 66 or 67) from the drop down list.
Data Enter the text string (with ASCII characters). Example: / path.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Option Status Displays the setting result for DHCP server option.Modify - Edit the selected VID.

• Option Number - Display the value.
• Enable Option - Select Enable or disable to change current setting.
  ● Data Type - At present, only ASCII Character is available.

- Delete the selected VALN ID.

II-2-2 Bind IP to MAC

This function is used to bind the IP and MAC address in LAN to have a strengthening control in network. With the Bind IP to MAC feature you can reserve LAN IP addresses for LAN clients. Each reserved IP address is associated with a Media Access Control (MAC) address.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
MAC Address	Enter the MAC address of the LAN client's network interface.
IPv4 Address	Enter the IP address to be associated with a MAC address.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Import Replace current settings with an existing file.
DHCP Bind IP to MAC Table	Displays a list for the IP bind to MAC information.Modify - It is used to edit the MAC address and IP address for the selected entry.

II-2-3 DHCP Relay

II-2-3-1 Global Setting

If you want to use another DHCP server in the network other than the Vigor switch's, you can let DHCP Relay help you to redirect the DHCP request to the specified location.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Append Agent Option	Enable - Enables the built-in DHCP server on Vigor switch.Disable - Disables the built-in DHCP server on Vigor switch.
Packets Contain Relay Agent Options	Set the packet processing method.Replace - Relay information already present in a packet is stripped and replaced with the router's own relay information.Keep - All packets are forwarded, relay information already present will be ignored.Drop - Received packets which already contain relay information will be discarded.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

II-2-3-2 Interface Setting

This page allows you to specify different DHCP server for LAN subnets.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Interface (VID) Select an interface (VID).If nothing to be selected, create a new one from VLAN Routing>>Interface Setting.
Server Address	Set the IP Address of the DHCP server to which DHCP requests from LAN clients are forwarded to.
Append Agent Option	As Global - Use the global settings (enabling built-in DHCP server) defined in Global Setting page.Enable - When selected, all DHCP requests are forwarded to a DHCP server outside of the LAN subnet, and whose address is specified in the DHCP Server IP Address field.Disable - Disable the function.
Packets Contain Relay Agent Options	As Global - Use the global settings defined in Global Setting page.Replace - Relay information already present in a packet is stripped and replaced with the router's own relay information.Keep - All packets are forwarded, relay information already present will be ignored.Drop - Received packets which already contain relay information will be discarded.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

Example:

II-3 Port Setting

II-3-1 General Setting

Port Setting is used to configure settings for the switch ports, trunk, Layer 2 protocols and other switch features.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports Use the drop down I	st to select one or more LAN port(s).
Enable State Enable -Click	it to enable the port.Disable - Click it to disable the port.
CCTV Mode Enable -Click	it to enable the port.Disable - Click it to disable the port.
Speed Port speed capabilities	Auto: Auto speed with all capabilities.Auto-10M: Auto speed with 10M ability only.Auto-100M: Auto speed with 100M ability only.Auto-1000M: Auto speed with 1000M ability only.Auto-10/100M: Auto speed with 10/ 100M ability.10M: Force speed with 10M ability.100M: Force speed with 100M ability.1000M: Force speed with 1000M ability.Selecting Auto (auto-negotiation) allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support. When auto-negotiation is turned on, a port on the switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode. If the peer port does not support auto-negotiation or turns off this feature, the switchdetermines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode. When the switch's auto-negotiation is turned off, a port uses the pre-configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection, thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect.For SFP fiber module, you might need to manually configure the speed to match fiber module speed.
Duplex Port duplex capabilities:Auto: Auto duplex with all capabilities.Half: Auto speed with 10/100M ability only.Full: Auto speed with 10/100/1000M ability only.
Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses. Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port. The switch uses IEEE802.3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in half duplex mode. IEEE802.3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port, causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill. Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a "collision" signal to the sending port (mimicking a state of packet collision) causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later.Enable - Click it to enable such function.Disable - Click it to disable such function.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Modify It is used to manually enter the description, state, speed,duplex, flow control for the port.

II-3-2 Protected Ports

This page allows the network administrator to configure protected port setting to prevent the selected ports from communication with each other. Protected port is only allowed to communicate with unprotected port.

For example, GE1 and GE3 are selected in Port List and Enable is clicked as Protected, then users behind GE1 and GE3 are separated and can not communicate with each other.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Protected Ports Settings	● Port List - Use the drop down list to select the port(s) (GE1 to GE10) for applying the settings configured in this page.● Protected - Click Enable to activate the protected port function.● Apply - The modification made above can be applied on to the selected GE port immediately.
Protected Port Status Display current status for each GE port.

II-4 Mirror

This section provides ability to mirror packets coming in or going out on any port to a destination port. Through the packet duplication in the destination port, this feature is convenient for system administrator to monitor / understand the traffic operation.

Session ID 1 to 4 can be enabled simultaneously and operate independently.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Session ID Select the session ID (profile 1 to 4) of mirror operation you wish to configure.
Monitor Session State Enable - Enable specified mirror session.Disable - Disable specified mirror session.
Destination Port Specify the port where you wish to observe the mirrored packets.
Allow Operation as Normal Port	Enable - The destination port is able to function as a port connecting to network, communicating with other network devices.Disable - Only observe the mirrored packets.
Sniff Ports (RX) / (TX)	Select the port(s) which you wish to mirror the traffic, Rx for mirror the packets into the port, Tx for mirror the packets going out from the port.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

II-5 Link Aggregation

LAG means Link Aggregation Group which groups some physical ports together to make a single high-bandwidth data path. Thus it can implement traffic load sharing among the member ports in a group to enhance the connection reliability.

II-5-1 LAG Setting

This page allows to configure Load Balance Algorithm for Link Aggregation.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Load Balance Algorithm	Select your Load balance algorithm.MAC address- Aggregated group will balance the traffic based on different MAC addresses. Therefore, the packets from different MAC addresses will be sent to different links.IP/Mac Address- Aggregated group will balance the traffic based on MAC addresses and IP addresses. Therefore, the packets from same MAC addresses but different IP addresses will be sent to different links.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

II-5-2 LAG Management

There are eight LAG profiles allowed to group different physical ports (GE1 to GE4). The system will assign certain port(s) as Active Member and Standby Member according to the GE selections.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Description Display the port description.
Port Type Display the type of the LAG.
Link Status Display LAG port link status.
Active Member	Display active member ports of the LAG.
Standby Member	Display inactive or candidate member ports of the LAG.
Modify It is used to edit the name, type and port number for each link aggregation profile.

Name- Enter a string as LAG name.Type - Use the drop down menu to specify the type for LAG.● Static- The static aggregated port sends packets over active member without detecting or negotiating with remote aggregated port.● LACP- The LACP aggregated ports place member into active only after negotiated with remote aggregated port for best reliability. Ports - Select the physical ports for this LAG profile.

II-5-3 LAG Port Setting

This page defines port setting for each LAG profile (LAG1 to LAG4), including data speed and enabling/disabling the flow control.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
LAG Use the drop down list to select one or more LAG profiles.
Enable	Enable -Click it to enable the profile.Disable - Click it to disable the profile.
Speed Port speed capabilities:Auto: Auto speed with all capabilities.Auto-10M: Auto speed with 10M ability only.Auto-100M: Auto speed with 100M ability only.Auto-1000M: Auto speed with 1000M ability only.Auto-10/100M: Auto speed with 10/ 100M ability.10M: Force speed with 10M ability.100M: Force speed with 100M ability.1000M: Force speed with 1000M ability.Selecting Auto (auto-negotiation) allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support. When
	auto-negotiation is turned on, a port on the switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode. If the peer port does not support auto-negotiation or turns off this feature, the switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode. When the switch's auto-negotiation is turned off, a port uses the pre-configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection, thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect.For SFP fiber module, you might need to manually configure the speed to match fiber module speed.
Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses. Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port. The switch uses IEEE802.3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in half duplex mode. IEEE802.3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port, causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill. Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a "collision" signal to the sending port (mimicking a state of packet collision) causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later.Enable - Click it to enable such function.Disable - Click it to disable such function.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Modify	It is used to edit status, speed, and flow control for the LAG.

II-5-4 LACP Setting

This page allows the network administrator to enable or disable the LACP function.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
LACP	Enable - Click it to enable such function.Disable - Click it to disable the function.
System Priority The priority	is used to determine which switch (local or remote) on the LAG connection is able to decide LACP activities. The lower the number is, the higher the priority for Vigorwitch will be. Therefore, the switch with the highest system priority (e.g., 1) can make decisions about which ports actively participate in LAG at a given time.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

II-5-5 LACP Port Setting

This section provides few detailed configuration regarding to Ports under LACP protocol.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports Use the drop down list to specify LAN Port.
Priority Enter a port priority number for the port.
Timeout The timeout option decides how local switch of LAG connection determines connection to be lost. Switch would also notify the remote switch about this setting value, so that remote switch can send LACP PDU in correct timing.Long - LACP PDU will be sent every 30 seconds. If port member is not seen over 90 seconds, it will cause port member timeout.Short - LACP PDU will be sent per second. If port member is not seen over 3 seconds, it will cause port member timeout.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Modify It is used to edit settings (priority and timeout) for LACP port.

II-6 VLAN Management

A virtual local area network, virtual LAN or VLAN, is a group of hosts with a common set of requirements that communicate as if they were attached to the same broadcast domain, regardless of their physical location. A VLAN has the same attributes as a physical local area network (LAN), but it allows for end stations to be grouped together even if they are not located on the same network switch. VLAN membership can be configured through software instead of physically relocating devices or connections.

II-6-1 Create VLAN

This page allows a user to add, edit or delete VLAN settings.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Action Select which action	to perform, add VLANs or delete VLANs.Add-Create a new VLAN profile.Delete-Delete an existed VLAN profile.
VLAN ID	Enter the number as VLAN ID to be created or deleted. If you want to create / delete multiple VLAN profiles, simply enter multiple VLAN ID separated by comma, and/ or range of VLAN ID using hyphen.
VLAN Name	Enter the prefix you wish to add followed by VLAN ID as VLAN name. Leave it empty for using default "VLAN".After clicking Apply, you will see:
	VLAN ID	VLAN Name	VLAN Type	Modify
	1	default	Default
	2	marketing0003	Static
	3	marketing0003	Static
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

Modify

- Modify the name of the selected VLAN ID.

New Name - Type a name for such VLAN profile.

OK - Apply the settings to the switch.

Cancel - Close the page and return to previous page.

- Delete the selected VALN ID.

II-6-2 Interface Settings

This page allows a user to configure interface setting related to VLAN.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Port Select Select LAN ports to configure VLAN Settings.
Interface VLAN Mode Select the VLAN mode of the interface.Hybrid – Support all functions as defined in IEEE 802.1Q specification.Access – Accept only untagged frames and join an untagged
	VLAN.Trunk- An untagged member of one VLAN at most, and is a tagged member of zero or more VLANs.Tunnel- Set a QinQ tunnel VLAN on the interface.
PVID	A PVID (Port VLAN ID) is a tag that adds to incoming untagged frames received on a port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines.For port underAccessMode, VLAN ID provided as PVID would automatically be selected as the untagged VLAN.
Accepted Type Specify the	acceptable-frame-type of the specified interfaces.It's only available with Hybrid mode.All- Accept frames regardless it's tagged with 802.1q or not.Tag Only- Accept frames only with 802.1q tagged.Untag Only- Accept frames untagged.
Ingress Filtering Enable the	ingress filtering to filter out any packets not belong to any VLAN members of this port. It is enabled automatically while operating in Access and Trunk mode.Enabled- Click it to enable the function.Disabled- Click it to disable the function.
Tagged VLAN Specify the	VLAN profile tagged in the VLAN.
Untagged VLAN	Specify the VLAN profile untagged in the VLAN.
Forbidden VLAN	Specify the VLAN profile forbidden in the VLAN.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Modify	ed port.

II-6-3 Voice VLAN

With such feature, a VLAN will be created temporarily and when the specified OUI device delivers protocol packets related to "VoIP", VigorSwitch will guide these packets into the specified Voice LAN with specified priority tag to speed up the packet transmission. Such voice VLAN is only active inside VigorSwitch for packet transmission. After these packets leave VigorSwitch, the Voice VLAN tag will be removed immediately.

II-6-3-1 Properties

This page allows a user to configure global and per interface setting of voice VLAN.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Voice VLAN State Enabled	- Click it to enable Voice VLAN. Disabled - Click it to disable Voice VLAN.
Voice VLAN Id Check the box of Enable first and then select Voice VLAN ID profile.
Remark CoS/802.1p	Click Enabled / Disabled to enable or disable 1p remarking. If enabled, qualified packets will be remarked by this value.
Remark Value Specify the number of packets to be remarked. Specify the CoS/ 802.1p number you wish ingress VoIP packets be tagged with, so that QoS can prioritize it correctly.
Aging Time	Select value of aging time (30~65536 min). Default is 1440 minutes. A voice VLAN entry will be age out after this time if without any packet pass through.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

II-6-3-2 Telephony OUI Setting

This page allows a user to add, edit or delete OUI MAC addresses. Default has 8 pre-defined OUI MAC.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
OUI Address Type OUI address.
Description Enter a description of the specified MAC address to the voice VLAN OUI table.
Add Click it to create a new voice OUI based on the settings configured above.
Modify
	- Click it to remove the selected OUI entry.

II-6-3-3 Port Setting

This page allows a user to specify LAN port(s) as Voice LAN port.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Port Use the drop down list to specify one or more LAN ports.
State	Enabled - Click it to enable the port settings for Voice LAN. Disabled - Click it to disable the port settings for Voice LAN.
Cos Mode	If Remark CoS/802.1p is enabled in Voice VLAN>>Properties, settings in this page shall be applied. Otherwise, this option will not take effect.All - Once this port is identified as Voice VLAN by frame with matched OUI, remark CoS/ 802.1p shall tag for all ingress frame regardless of remarked frame matched with pre-configured OUI or not.Src (Source) - Once this port is identified as Voice VLAN by frame with matched OUI, remark CoS/ 802.1p shall tag for only the matched ingress frame with pre-configured OUI.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Edit	Click the icon under Edit for one entry to modify port settings (State, Cos Mode) for voice VLAN.

II-6-4 MAC VLAN

II-6-4-1 MAC Group

The MAC VLAN allows you to statically assign a VLAN ID to a host with specific MAC address(es). VigorSwitch allows you to configure multiple groups with configured MAC address and mask to be active on ports and to be bound with VLAN ID. This page allows the network administrator to define groups with specific MAC addresses for later binding with VLAN and Port.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Group ID It is a number for	identification later, while chosen to bebound with VLAN/ Port.
MAC Address	Enter the MAC address you wish to be classified in this group
Mask	The mask is the length of matching prefix you wish to have on MAC address.For example, configure mask in 10. It means a host with beginning of the 10-digit of MAC address will be checked, and classified into this group if matched.
Add Click it to create a new MAC group profile based on the settings configured above.
Edit	Click the icon under Edit for one entry to modify settings for group ID.

II-6-4-3 Group Binding

The MAC VLAN allows you to statically assign a VLAN ID to a host with specific MAC address(es). VigorSwitch allows you to configure multiple groups with configured MAC address and mask to be active on ports and to be bound with VLAN ID. This page allows the network administrator to bind the group of specified MAC addresses with VLAN and Port.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports Select the ports you	wish to be bound with specified MAC address group.
Group ID Choose the group	ID you have created in earlier section, which specified a group of host by MAC address and its mask.
VLAN Enter the VLAN ID th	at you wish to be bound with.
Add Click it to create a new MAC group binding profile based on the settings configured above.
Edit	Click the icon under Edit for one entry to modify settings for selected port profile.
Delete Click to remove the selected entry.

II-6-5 Protocol VLAN

VigorSwitch offers protocol VLANs which allows Network Administrator to filter out untagged traffic of certain protocol and then assign them a specific VLAN ID.

II-6-5-1 Protocol Group

Up to eight protocol groups can be defined, each of them can have a unique filtering criteria such as frame type and protocol value.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Group ID It is a number for	identification while bounding with VLAN/ Port.
Frame Type	Use the drop-down list to specify the frame type which you would like to filter.Ethernet_IIEthernet_IIIEEE802.3_LLC_OtherRFC_1042Ethernet_II - Packet will be mapped based on Ethernet version 2.IEEE802.3_LLC_Other -Packet will be mapped based on 802.3 packet with LLC other header.RFC_1042 - Packet will be mapped based on RFC 1042.
Protocol Value Input a value (ranging from 0x600 ~0xFFFE). Packets match with such value will be classified into this group.
Add Click it to create a new protocol group profile based on the settings configured above.

Edit

- Modify setting for selected group.

- Click it to remove the group.

II-6-5-2 Group Binding

This page is for setting up the ports and protocol group that we would like to filter, and the VLAN ID we would like to assign.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports Use the drop-down list to select one or more ports for applying protocol-based VLAN. Note that protocol-based VLAN can only be applied to the ports of which Interface VLAN Mode (at VLAN Management >> Interface Settings) is set to “Hybrid”.
Group ID Select the protocol group defined in Protocol Group setup.
VLAN	Use drop down list to choose a value as VLAN number.
Add Add the above settings to the switch.Before using Add, open Switch LAN>>VLAN Management>>Interface Settings to specify Hybrid as Interface VLAN Mode for the GE ports first. Otherwise, the following error message will appear.
	Some problems happendSet Protocol-base VLAN Binding: Port must be in General ModeSet Protocol-base VLAN Binding: Port must be in General Mode
Edit	- Modify setting for the selected group.- Click it to remove the selected group.

II-6-6 Surveillance VLAN

Surveillance VLAN can be configured for VigorSwitch to identify the packets coming from an IP camera automatically and assign those traffics to a specific VLAN ID and CoS/ 802.1p value, this helps you to prioritize those traffics and improve video quality.

II-6-6-1 Property

This page is for setting up the VLAN to which the video traffic should be assigned and to enable/disable Surveillance VLAN on each port.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
State	Enabled - Click it to enable the port settings for such VLAN. Disabled - Click it to disable the port settings for such VLAN.
VLAN ID	Choose a VLAN profile (created in Switch LAN>>VLAN Management>>Create Vlan) as Surveillance VLAN.
CoS/802.1p Remarking	Specify the CoS/ 802.1p number you wish ingress packets be tagged with, so that QoS can prioritize it correctly. Enable - If enabled, qualified packets will be remarked by this value.
Aging Time Unit is second	Select value of aging time (30~65536 seconds). Default is 1440 seconds. VLAN entry will be aged out after this time if no packet passes through.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

II-6-6-2 Surveillance OUI

Filtering Surveillance traffic is based on the OUI of the IP cameras. Users can add, edit, and delete OUI on this page.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
OUI Address Enter OUI MAC address of monitored IP camera. It can't be edited in edit dialog.
Description Enter a description of the specified MAC address to the surveillance VLAN OUI table.
Add Click it to create a new voice OUI based on the settings configured above.
Edit	- Modify OUI setting for surveillance VLAN.- Click it to remove the selected OUI entry.

II-6-6-3 Port Setting

This page allows you to set the QoS policy for a selected GE port or LAG.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Port Select the GE port or	LAG to apply the settings.
State	Set it to enable surveillance VLAN function of interface.
Mode Select port surveillance	ance VLAN mode.Auto: Surveillance VLAN auto detect packets that match OUI table and add received port into surveillance VLAN ID tagged member.Manual: User need add interface to VLAN ID tagged member manually.
QoS Policy QoS Policy - Select port QoS Policy mode.Video Packet: QoS attributes are applied to packets with OUI in the source MAC address.All: QoS attributes are applied to packets that are classified to the Surveillance VLAN.
Edit	ing status.OK - Apply the settings to the switch.Cancel - Abandon the changes and return to previous page.

II-6-7 GVRP

II-6-7-1 Property

To enable/ disable the GVRP function, click Enable / Disable radio button.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
State	Enabled - Click it to enable the function. Disabled - Click it to disable the function.
Timeout Displays the current time status for the GVRP.
Apply Applys the settings to the switch.

II-6-7-2 Port Setting

This page allows the network administrator to configure registration mode (e.g., Normal, Fixed or Forbidden) of GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) for each GE port.

It can eliminate unnecessary network traffic and prevent any attempt to transmit information to unregistered users.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports Select GE or LAG port(s).
State	Enabled - Click it to enable the port settings for such VLAN. Disabled - Click it to disable the port settings for such VLAN.
VLAN Creation Select Enabled or Disabled.
Mode	Mode - There are three modes to be specified.● Normal - Default setting. All packets can pass through the selected GE port.● Fixed - The selected GE port only sends static VLAN information to neighboring device and allows static VLAN packet to pass through.● Forbidden - The selected GE port only allows default VLAN packet to pass through.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Edit	- Click it to modify settings for the selected port.

II-6-7-3 Membership

This page display information about membership for GVRP.

This page allows a user to enable or disable port EEE (Energy Efficient Ethernet) function.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Port	Select one or multiple ports to configure (GE1 to GE10).
Enable	Enable -Click it to enable the EEE function.Disable - Click it to disable the EEE function.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Modify

II-8 Multicast

IP multicast is a technique for one-to-many communication over an IP infrastructure in a network.

To avoid the incoming data broadcasting to all GE ports, multicast is useful to transfer the data/ message to specified GE ports for IGMP snooping. When VigorSwitch receives a message "subscribed" by the client, it must decide to transfer the data to specified GE ports according to the location of the client (subscribed member).

II-8-1 Properties

For the multicast packets, This page allows the network administrator to choose actions for processing the unknown multicast packets and for handling known packets with MAC address, IP address and VLAN ID.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Unknown Multicast Action	Select an action for switch to handle with unknown multicast packet.Drop: Drop the unknown multicast data.Flood: Flood the unknown multicast data.Forward to Router port: Forward the unknown multicast data to router port.
IPv4 Forward Method / IPv6 Forward Method	Set the IPv4/ IPv6 multicast forward method.Dst. MAC & VID: Forward using destination multicast MAC address and VLAN IDs.Dst. IP & VID: Forward using destination multicast IP address and VLAN ID.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

II-8-2 IGMP Snooping

IGMP snooping is the process of listening to Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) network traffic. The feature allows a network switch to listen in on the IGMP conversation between hosts and routers. By listening to these conversations the switch maintains a map of which links need which IP multicast streams. Multicasts may be filtered from the links which do not need them and thus controls which ports receive specific multicast traffic.

graph TD
    A["Source"] --> B["PIM (IPv4)"]
    B --> C["Vigor router"]
    C --> D["VigorSwitch"]
    D --> E["Host A"]
    D --> F["Host B"]
    D --> G["Host C"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

graph TD
    A["Source"] --> B["Vigor router"]
    B --> C["IGMP Snooping"]
    C --> D["Host A"]
    C --> E["Host B"]
    C --> F["Host C"]
    B --> G["VigorSwitch"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

II-8-2-1 IGMP Setting

This page allows the network administrator to enable/disable IGMP function, select snooping version, and enable/disable snooping report suppression.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
IGMP Snooping State Enable	- Click it to set enabling IGMP function.Disable - Click it to disable IGMP function.
IGMP Snooping Version Set the IGMP snooping version.v2 - Only support process IGMP v2 packet.v3 (BISS) - Support v3 basic and v2.
IGMP Snoopign Report Suppression	Click Enable to allow the switch to handle IGMP reports between router and host, suppressing bandwidth used by IGMP.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Modify	- Click it to modify IGMP settings for selected profile. However, if IGMP Snooping State is not set as Enable, such option will be disabled.
	IGMP Snooping State -Choose Enable to enable IGMP snooping function.Router Ports Auto Learn - Set the enabling status of IGMP router port learning. Choose Enable to learn router port by IGMP query.Query Robustness - Set a number which allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet.Query Interval - Set the interval of querier send general query.Query Response Interval - It specifies the maximum allowed time before sending a responding report in units of 1/10second.Last Member Query Counter- After quering for specified times (defined here) and still not receiving any response from the subscribed member, VigorSwitch will stop transmitting data to the related GE port(s).Last Member Query Interval- The maximum time interval between counting each member query message with no responses from any subscribed member.Immediate Leave- Leave the multicast group immediately on the port & VLAN where leave message is sent from, regardless there is still a subscribed member or not. Click Enable to enable Fastleave function.OK- Apply the settings to the switch.Cancel- Close the page and return to previous page.

II-8-2-2 IGMP Querier Setting

This page allows a user to configure querier settings on specific VLAN of IGMP Snooping.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
VLAN ID	Use the drop down list to specify a VLAN profile as IGMP Snooping querier.
Querier State	Enable - Click Enable to set the enabling status of IGMP Querier on the chosen VLAN profile.Disable - Click it to disable the function.
Querier Version Set the query version of IGMP Querier Election on the chosen VLANs.v2 - Querier version 2.v3 - Querier version 3.Note: For maximum compatibility, it is suggested to use querier version lower than IGMP snooping version, for there is possible network mixed with IGMP v2/ v3 client and v2 query message is widerly understandable for those clients.

Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

II-8-2-3 IGMP Static Group

The IGMP static group is allowed to assign a VLAN/ port as a specific IPv4 multicast member. Every IPv4 multicast stream that belongs to the specified group IP address will be forwarded to the specified port/ VLAN member.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
VLAN ID	Use the drop down list to specify a VLAN profile as IGMP Static Group.
Group IP Address It is an id	identifier for the group member. Packets sent to such address will be transferred to all interfaces defined in Member Ports.Specify the IPv4 multicast address you wish to assign for the static group (defined in VLAN ID).
Member Ports Specify the	port(s) that static group with given IPv4 multicast address shall include.
Apply Apply the settings to	the switch.
Modify	- Click it to modify settings.

II-8-2-4 IGMP Group Table

This page shows currently known and dynamically learned by IGMP snooping or shows the assigned IPv4 multicast address group in operation.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
VLAN ID	Display the VLAN of this multicast group belongs to.
Group IP Address	Display the multicast address of this multicast group.
Member Ports Display the port(s) where subscribing member of this multicast group belongs to.
Type Display if it is dynamically learned or statically assigned.
Life(sec.) Display the life time of this multicast member left if no membership report sent again.

II-8-2-5 IGMP Router Table

This page shows the IGMP querier router known to this switch.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
VLAN ID	Use the drop down list to specify a VLAN profile (created in Switch LAN>>VLAN Management>>Create Vlan) that the MLD querier belongs to.
Type	Static - Specify LAN Port (GE/ LAG) to send out query to remote host.Forbidden - Use the drop down list to specify forbidden LAN Port (GE/ LAG).
Member Ports Use the drop down list to choose the uplink ports where querier router exists.
Add Click it to display the result based on the settings configured above.
Port Display the static port member specified in Member Ports.
Expire Time (sec.)	Display the time before querier is considered no longer existed.
Edit Click the icon under Edit to modify the settings for the selected VLAN profile.

II-8-2-6 Forward All

This page is allowed to determine which port(s) would like to receive the data (multicast packets) that forwarded by VigorSwitch.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Available VLAN	To display all of the available VLAN, the State must be set as Enabled in MLD Setting first.Use the drop down list to specify a VLAN profile (created in Switch LAN>>VLAN Management>>Create Vlan) that multicast packets will be forwarded to.
Static Ports	Use the drop down list to specify LAN Port (GE/ LAG).Later, the multicast packets will be delivered to the network device connected by these ports.
Forbidden Ports Use the drop down list to specify forbidden LAN Port (GE/ LAG).Later, the multicast packets will not be delivered to the network device connected by these ports.
Add Click it to display the result based on the settings configured above.
Edit	- Click it to modify port setting (static port and forbidden port).- Click it to remove the selected entry.

II-8-2-7 Throttling

The administrator can configure the user on a switch port (GE/LAG port) belonging to which multicast group and restrict the number of multicast group that the user on the switch can join. Then the administrator is able to control the network service (e.g, IP/TV service) that the user can enjoy.

The Throttling page is used for configuring the maximum number (0\~255) of IGMP group that a user on a switch port can join. After defined the maximum number, each switch port interface can be set to deny the IGMP join report or set to replace randomly selected multicast interface with received IGMP join report.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports	Use the drop down list to specify LAN Port (GE/ LAG).
Max Group Define the maximum number of IGMP group profile that a user on the switch can join. If “0” is selected, then such interface (port) can join all of the IGMP group profiles (defined in Filtering Profile).
Exceed Action VigorSwitch will perform the action defined below when the number of IGMP join report for the specified interface exceeds value defined in Max Group.Deny - It is default setting. The IGMP join report (for multicast service) received by such interface will be discarded.Replace - When it is selected, a new group with IGMP report received will replace the existing group.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Edit	- Click it to modify port setting (max group and exceed action).

II-8-2-8 Filtering Profile

The administrator can configure the user on a switch port (GE/LAG port) belonging to which multicast group and restrict the number of multicast group that the user on the switch can join. Then the administrator is able to control the network service (e.g, IP/TV service) that the user can enjoy.

The filtering profile page allows to configure up to 128 IP-group (for multicast servie) profiles (starting and ending point within an IP range shall be specified). Each IP group profile can be set for permission of / denial of network service respectively.

In addition, such filtering profile is only effective for controlling the query for multicast. It has nothing to do with the general IGMP query.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Profile ID Use the drop down list to select one filtering profile (1~128) for IGMP snooping.
Start Address	Enter an IP address as the starting point for the IP range.
End Address	Enter an IP address as the ending point for the IP range.
Action	Deny - It is default se multicast traffic will be discarded.Allow - When it is selected, the request for multicast traffic will be forwarded to the multicast group normally.
Add Click it to display the result based on the settings configured
	above.
Edit	[CV37] - Click it to modify port setting (max group and exceed action).

II-8-2-9 Filtering Binding

This page allows the network administrator to select a filtering profile for LAN/GE port to process multicast traffic.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports	Use the drop down list to specify LAN Port (GE/ LAG).
Profile ID Use the drop down list to choose the filtering profile for the select port/ interface. Enable - Check this box first to make profile ID selection be available for choosing.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Edit	- Click it to modify port setting (enabling / disabling filter function and choosing a profile for such interface).

II-8-3 MVR

Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) can route packets received in a multicast source VLAN to one or more desination VLANs. LAN users are in the destination VLANs and the multicast server is in the source VLAN.

MVR can continuously send multicast stream for traffic in the multicast VLAN, but isolate the streams from the source VLANs for bandwidth and security reasons.

In general, MVR is able to:

• Identify the MVR IP multicast streams and their associated IP multicast group.
• Intercept the IGMP messages

II-8-3-1 Property

This page allows the network administrator to configure general settings for MVR, such as enabling function, selecting VLAN ID (as source VLAN) and specify IP address(es) for receiver/LAN users.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
State	Enabled - Click it to enable the MVR function. Disabled - Click it to disable the MVR function.
VLAN ID	Choose one VLAN profile from the drop down list as multicast source VLAN which will receive multicast data. All source ports must belong to this VLAN. The default is VLAN 1.Note: Each VLAN ID shall be configured with group address and member port (defined in MVR>>Group Address page).
Mode There are two modes	offered for MVR operation.Comaptible - Multicast data received by MVR hosts (multicast server) will be forwarded to all MVR receiver ports.Dynamic - Multicast data received by MVR hosts (multicastserver) on Vigor switch will be forwarded from those MVR data and client ports grouped under MVR server.
Group Start Enter an IP address. Any multicast data sent to this IP address will be sent to all source ports on Vigor switch; and all receiver ports will accept / receive data from that multicast address.
Group Count	Select a number to configure a contiguous series of MVR group addresses (the range for count is 1 to 128; the default is 1).
Query Time Use the drop down list to define the maximum time (1 - 10 seconds) to wait for IGMP report members on a receiver port before the port is removed from multicast group.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Operation Group Display group information for MVR operation.

II-8-3-2 Port Setting

It is necessary to specify destination port and source port (GE/LAG) for Vigor system to perform MVR operation.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports	Use the drop down list to select LAN Port (GE/LAG). Later, each port can be set as Recevier or Source port respectively. If you do not satisfy with the port setting, simply click the Edit button to make the modification.
Role	None - Noting will be happed to the selected LAN port in MVR operation.Receiver - The selected port will be treated as destination port which will receive multicast data from the multicast server.Source - The selected port will be treated as source port which will send multicast data to the receiver port.
Immediate Leave	Enabled - Enable the function fo immediate leave. When the port (with the role of receiver) receives the leave message, itwill be removed from multicast group to speed up leave latency. Disabled - Disable the function of immediate leave.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Edit	- Click it to modify port setting (role and immediate leave).

II-8-3-3 Group Address

This page allows the network administrator to configure IP address and specify port member for VLAN selected in MVR>>Property page.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
VLAN ID Display the ID number of the VLAN.
Group Address Define a range of IP address(es) with the format of “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx - xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”.
Member	Choose GE/ LAG port to be grouped under the selected VLAN.
Add Click it to display the result based on the settings configured
	above.
Edit	- Click it to modify the settings.

II-8-4 MLD Snooping

MLD snooping does the same thing as IGMP snooping. The difference is that IGMP snooping acts on IPv4 packets; MLD snooping acts on IPv6 packets. MLD snooping is the process of listening to Multicast Listener Discovery network traffic. It can examine IPv6 packets and forward these packets to designate location via VLAN port members.

graph TD
    A["Source"] --> B["Vigor router"]
    B --> C["VigorSwitch"]
    C --> D["Host A"]
    C --> E["Host B"]
    C --> F["Host C"]
    G["PIM (IPv6)"] --> B
    style G fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

graph TD
    A["Source"] --> B["Vigor router"]
    B --> C["MLD Snooping"]
    C --> D["VigorSwitch"]
    D --> E["Host A"]
    D --> F["Host B"]
    D --> G["Host C"]
    H["PIM (IPv6)"] --> B

II-7-4-1 MLD Setting

This page allows the network administrator to enable/disable MLD Snooping function, select snooping version, and enable/disable snooping report suppression.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
State	Enabled - Click it to enable the MLD snooping function. Disabled - Click it to disable the MLD snooping function.
Version VigorSwitch supports two versions of MLD snooping.MLDv1 - When it is selected, VigorSwitch will detect packets controlled by MLDv1 andbridgethe traffic to IPv6 destination defined with multicast address(es).MLDv2 - When it is selected, VigorSwitch will detect packets controlled by MLDv1 andforwardthe traffic to destination defined with multicast address(es).
Report Suppression Enabled - Click it to allow the switch to handle MLD reports between router and host, suppressing bandwidth used by MLD. Disabled - Click it to disable the function.
Apply Click it to display the result based on the settings configured above.
Edit	MLD Snooping State - Enable/ disable the MLD snooping function for the selected port.Router Ports Auto Learn -Set the enabling status of IGMP router port learning. ChooseEnableto learn router port by MLD query.Query Robustness - Set a number which allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet.Query Interval - Specify the time interval for VigorSwitch to send out general MLD query to the host (responsible for responding). Later, based on the response, VigorSwitch can forward the traffic through ports in VLAN.Query Response Interval - Specify the time interval for VigorSwitch to receive the query response from the host. If time is up and no response received, the packets will be blocked and discarded.Last Member Query Counter - After quering for specified times (defined here) and still not receiving any response from the subscribed member, VigorSwitch will stop transmitting data to the related GE port(s).Last Member Query Interval - The maximum time interval between counting each member query message with no responses from any subscribed member.Immediate Leave - Click Enable to enable the function of immediate leave. When the GE/ LAG port receives the leave message, it will be removed from multicast group to speed up leave latency.OK - Apply the settings to the switch.Cancel - Close the page and return to previous page.

II-8-4-2 MLD Static Group

The MLD static group is allowed to assign a VLAN/ port as a specific IPv6 multicast member. Every IPv6 multicast stream that belongs to the specified group IP address will be forwarded to the specified port/ VLAN member.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
VLAN ID	Use the drop down list to specify a VLAN profile (created in Switch LAN>>VLAN Management>>Create Vlan) as MLD Static Group.However, if State in MLD Setting is not set as Enabled, such option will be disabled and no ID can be selected.
Group IP Address It is an i	identifier for the group member. Packets sent to suchaddress will be transferred to all interfaces defined in Member Ports.Specify the IPv6 multicast address you wish to assign for the static group (defined in VLAN ID).
Member Ports Use the drop down list to specify interfaces (GE/ LAG) for receiving the packets from group IP address.
Apply Click it to display the result based on the settings configured above.

II-8-4-3 MLD Group Table

This page shows currently known and dynamically learned by MLD snooping or shows the assigned IP6 multicast address group in operation.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
VLAN ID Display the name of VLAN configured in MLD Static Group.
Group IP Address	Display the IP adderss defined in MLD Static Group.
Member Ports	Display all of the interfaces defined in MLD Static Group.
Type Display if it is dynamically learned or statically assigned.
Life(sec.) Display the life time of this multicast member left if no membership report sent again.

II-8-4-4 MLD Router Table

This page is allowed to configure VLAN profile by specifying static/ forbidden ports for the router (MLD querier).

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
VLAN ID	Use the drop down list to specify a VLAN profile (created in Switch LAN>>VLAN Management>>Create Vlan) that the MLD querier belongs to.
Type	Static - Specify LAN Port (GE/ LAG) to send out query to remote host.Forbidden - Use the drop down list to specify forbidden LAN Port (GE/ LAG).
Member Ports Use the drop down list to choose the uplink ports where querier router exists.
Add Click it to display the result based on the settings configured above.
Port Displays the static port member specified in Member Ports.
Expire Time (sec.) Displays the time before querier is considered no longer existed.
Edit	- Click it to modify the settings for the selected entry.

II-8-4-5 Forward All

This page is allowed to determine which port(s) would like to receive the data (multicast packets) that forwarded by VigorSwitch.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Available VLAN	To display all of the available VLAN, the State must be set as Enabled in MLD Setting first.Use the drop down list to specify a VLAN profile (created in Switch LAN>>VLAN Management>>Create Vlan) that multicast packets will be forwarded to.
Static Ports	Use the drop down list to specify LAN Port (GE/ LAG).Later, the multicast packets will be delivered to the network device connected by these ports.
Forbidden Ports Use the drop down list to specify forbidden LAN Port (GE/ LAG).Later, the multicast packets will not be delivered to the network device connected by these ports.
Add Click it to display the result based on the settings configured above.
Edit	- Click it to modify port setting (static port and forbidden port).- Click it to remove the selected entry.

II-8-4-6 Throttling

The administrator can configure the user on a switch port (GE/LAG port) belonging to which multicast group and restrict the number of multicast group that the user on the switch can join. Then the administrator is able to control the network service (e.g, IP/TV service) that the user can enjoy.

The Throttling page is used for configuring the maximum number (0\~255) of MLD group that a user on a switch port can join. After defined the maximum number, each switch port interface can be set to deny the MLD join report or set to replace randomly selected multicast interface with received MLD join report.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports	Use the drop down list to specify LAN Port (GE/ LAG) for applying throttling feature.
Max Group Define the maximum number of MLD group profile that a user on the switch can join. If “0” is selected, then such interface (port) can join all of the MLD group profiles (defined in Filtering Profile).
Exceed Action VigorSwitch will perform the action defined below when the number of MLD join report for the specified interface exceeds value defined in Max Group.Deny - It is default setting. The MLD join report (for multicast service) received by such interface will be discarded.Replace - When it is selected, a new group with MLD report received will replace the existing group.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Edit	- Click it to modify the settings for the selected entry.

II-8-4-7 Filtering Profile

The administrator can configure the user on a switch port (GE/LAG port) belonging to which multicast group and restrict the number of multicast group that the user on the switch can join. Then the administrator is able to control the network service (e.g, IP/TV service) that the user can enjoy.

The filtering profile page allows to configure up to 128 IP-group (for multicast servie) profiles (starting and ending point within an IP range shall be specified). Each IP group profile can be set for permission of / denial of network service respectively.

In addition, such filtering profile is only effective for controlling the query for multicast traffic. It has nothing to do with the general MLD query.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Profile ID Use the drop down list to select one filtering profile (1~128) for MLD snooping.
Start Address	Enter an IP address as the starting point for the IP range.
End Address	Enter an IP address as the ending point for the IP range.
Action	Deny - It is default setting. The fo multicast traffic will be discarded.

	Allow - When it is selected, the request for multicast traffic will be forwarded to the multicast group normally.
Add Click it to display the	result based on the settings configured above.
Edit	K3G4]

II-8-4-8 Filtering Binding

This page allows the network administrator to select a filtering profile for LAN/GE port to process multicast traffic.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports	Use the drop down list to specify LAN Port (GE/ LAG).
Profile ID Use the drop down list to choose the filtering profile for the select port/ interface.Enable - Check this box first to make profile ID selection be available for choosing.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Edit

II-9 Jumbo Frame

This page allows a user to configure switch port jumbo frame settings.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Jumbo Frame (Bytes) Enter Jumbo frame size. The valid range is 1526 bytes - 9216 bytes.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

II-10 STP

The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is a network protocol that ensures a loop-free topology for any bridged Ethernet local area network.

Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) are frames that contain information about the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). Switches send BPDUs using a unique MAC address from its origin port and a multicast address as destination MAC (01:80:C2:00:00:00, or 01:00:0C:CC:CC:CD for Per VLAN Spanning Tree).

For STP algorithms to function, the switches need to share information about themselves and their connections. What they share are bridge protocol data units (BPDUs).

BPDUs are sent out as multicast frames to which only other layer 2 switches or bridges are listening. If any loops (multiple possible paths between switches) are found in the network topology, the switches will co-operate to disable a port or ports to ensure that there are no loops; that is, from one device to any other device in the layer 2 network, only one path can be taken.

II-10-1 Properties

This page allows a user to configure and display Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) property configuration.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
STP Mode Set the operating mode of Spanning Tree (STP).Disabled - Disable the STP operation.STP - Enable the Spanning Tree (STP) operation.RSTP - Enable the Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP) operation.MSTP - Enable the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) operation.
BPDU Handling Specify the BPDU forward method when the STP is disabled.Filtering - Filter the BPDU when STP is disabled.
	Flooding - Flood the BPDU when STP is disabled.
PathCost Method Specify	the path cost method.Long - Specifies that the default port path costs are within the range: 1~200,000,000.Short - Specifies that the default port path costs are within the range: 1~65,535.
Apply Apply the settings to	the switch.

II-10-2 Port Setting

This page allows the user to configure and display Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) port settings.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports Use the drop down to specify the interface ID or the list of interface IDs.
Path Cost (0=Auto)	Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge. The slower the media, the higher the cost. Entering 0 means the switch will automatically assign a value.
Priority	Specify a priority value for the switch. The smaller the priority value, the higher the priority and greater chance of becoming the root.
Edge Port In the edge mode, the interface would be put into the Forwarding state immediately upon link up. If the edge mode is enabled for the interface and there are BPDUs received on the interface, the loop might be occurred in the short time before the STP state change.Yes - Enable the function.No - Disable the function.
P2P Option	Auto - VigorSwitch determines the STP of link type for thisport automatically.Yes - It means the STP of link type on this port is full-duplex and directly connect to another switch or host.No - It means the STP of link type on this port is “not” full-duplex and “does not” directly connect to another switch or host.
BPDU Filter	Yes - Drop all BPDU packets and no BPDU will be sent.
BPDU Guard Yes - BPDU Guard further protects your switch by turning this port into error state and shutdown if any BPDU received from this port. Check it to enable such function.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch. After clicking it, the settings configured above will be shown on the table below.
Ports	Use the drop down to specify the interface(s) for applying the function of Migrate.
Migrate Click it to force the port(s) specified above to send one RSTP BPDU (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Unit).
Admin Enable YES - Such port is managed by VigorSwitch.
Edit Click it to modify the settings for the selected GE port.

II-10-3 Bridge Setting

This page allows the network administrator to configure required information to negotiate with other VigorSwitch for determining the bridge switch.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Priority Specify the bridge	priority. The valid range is from 0 to 61440, and the value should be the multiple of 4096. It ensures the probability that the switch is selected as the root bridge, and the lower value has the higher priority for the switch to be selected as the root bridge of the topology.
Forward Delay Specify the	STP forward delay time, which is the amount of time that a port remains in the Listening and Learning states before it enters the Forwarding state. Its valid range is from 4 to 10 seconds.
Max Age Specify the time	nterval in seconds for a switch to wait the configuration messages, without attempting to redefine its own configuration.
Tx Hold Count Specify the	tx-hold-count used to limit the maximum numbers of packets transmission per second. The valid range is from 1 to 10.
Hello Time	Specify the STP hello time in second to broadcast its hello message to other bridge by Designated Ports. Its valid range is from 1 to 10 seconds.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

II-10-4 Port Advanced Setting

This page allows user to edit general setting of STP CIST port and browser CIST port status.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Port Display the interface	number for GE and LAG.
Indentifier(Priority/ID)	Display the spanning tree port identifier.
Path Cost Conf/Oper	Display current path cost of given port.
Designated Root Bridge	display the identifier of designated root bridge.
Root Path Cost Display the operational root path cost.
Designated Bridge Display	the identifier of next bridge on this port.
Edge Port Conf/Oper	Display if this port is configured as Edge of STP network, for speed up link up.
P2P MAC Conf/Oper	Display if this port is configured as point to point link to another switch or host.
Port Role Display current	port role on the specified port. The possible values will be: “Disabled”, “Root”, “Designated”, “Alternative”, and “Backup”.
Port State Display current	port state on the specified port. The possible values will be: “Disabled”, “Discarding”, “Learning”, and “Forwarding”.
Edit Click it to modify the priority setting for the selected GE port / LAG port.

II-10-5 Statistics

This page displays STP statistics.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Port Display the port number (GE / LAG).
Configure BPDUs Rx.	Display the counts of the received CONFIG BPDU.
TCN BPDUs Rx.	Display the counts of the received TCN BPDU.
Configure BPDUs Tx.	Display the counts of the transmitted CONFIG BPDU.
TCN BPDUs Rx	Display the counts of the transmitted TCN BPDU.

II-10-6 MST Instance

MSTP allows traffic of different VLAN to be mapped into different MST Instances. VigorSwitch supports up to 16 independent MST instances (0\~15) with which the VLAN can be associated.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
MSTI Display the index number of MST Instance. Each MSTI can have one or multiple VLANs.
Edit	- Click it to modify the priority setting for the selected GE port / LAG port.

VLAN - Enter the ID (1-4094) of the VLAN which should be associated with this MSTI.

Priority - The switch priority for this MST instance. A lower number gives the switch higher chance to be chosen as the root bridge.

Bridge Identifier - Display the priority of MSTI instance number + MAC address of the switch.

Designated Root Bridge - Display the Bridge Identifier of the root bridge.

Root Port - Display the port toward the root.

Root Path Cost - Display the path cost toward the root.

Remaining Hop - Display the remaining hop count in BPDU. OK - Save the modifications.

II-10-7 MST Port Setting

MST Port Settings is used to configure the GE port / LAG group settings for each MST instance. The table displays the MST parameters for each port.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
MSTI Select one of the M	ST instances.
Edit	- Click it to modify the path cost and priority setting for the port.MSTI - Display the selected MST instance.Path Cost - Set path cost value for the port. A port with lowest value will be used as the forwarding port by spanning tree. Default value was set according to the bandwidth of the port.Priority - Among the ports with same path cost, port with lower priority will have higher chance to be used as the forwarding port by spanning tree. Use the drop down list to choose desired priority value.

II-11 MAC Address Table

This section allows user to view the dynamic MAC address entries in the MAC table, change related setting, and assign MAC address into MAC table.

II-1 1-1 Static MAC Setting

This section allows user to manually assign MAC address into MAC table. The configuration result will be displayed on the table listed on the lower side of this web page.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
MAC Address	Enter the MAC address that will be forwarded.
VLAN	This is the VLAN group to which the MAC address belongs.
Port Select the port where	received frame of matched destinationMAC address will be forwarded to.
Add	Click it to add any port into the static MAC table.
Delete Click it to remove the selected port from the static MAC table.

II-11-2 Dynamic Address Setting

This page allows a user to configure aging time for dynamic MAC address.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Aging Time Enter the Dynamic MAC address aging out value (5-32767 seconds).
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

II-11-3 L2 Table

II-11-3-1 All Mac Address

This page displays the MAC address automatically learned by VigorSwitch.

II-1 1-3-2 Dynamic Learned

This page displays the MAC address and port number automatically learned by VigorSwitch.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
MAC Address	Display the MAC address that will be forwarded.
VLAN	Display the VLAN group to which the MAC address belongs.
Type	Display whether the MAC address is Dynamic (learned by the Switch) or Static Unicast (manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen).
Port	Display the port to which this MAC address belongs.
Add to Static Click this button to add any port into the static MAC table.

II-12 Blocked Port Recover

This page is used for configuring settings to recover the port which is being blocked by the following functions after a defined period of time.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Recovery Interval The port being blocked will be able to receive and send traffic after the time period configured here.
BPDU Guard Enable - Recover the port being blocked by BPDU Guard after the time set in Recovery Interval.
Self Loop Enable - Recover the port being blocked by self loop Guard after the time set in Recovery Interval.
Broadcast Flood Enable - Recover the port being blocked by broadcast flood after the time set in Recovery Interval.
Unknown Multicast Flood Enable - Recover the port being blocked by unknown multicast flood after the time set in Recovery Interval.
Unicast Flood Enable - Recover the port being blocked by unicast flood after the time set in Recovery Interval.
ACL	Enable - Recover the port being blocked by ACL after the time set in Recovery Interval.
Port Security Enable - Recover the port being blocked by port security after the time set in Recovery Interval.
DHCP Rate Limit Enable - Recover the port being blocked by DHCP rate limit after the time set in Recovery Interval.
ARP Rate Limit Enable - Recover the port being blocked by ARP rate limit after the time set in Recovery Interval.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

Part III ONVIF Surveillance

III-1 Topology

ONVIF (Open Network Video Interface Forum), an International standard for current surveillance system industry, focuses on security products based on network IP address.

With this feature, VigorSwitch can:

● Integrate the ONVIF device and surveillance network
● Centralize management of IP video products
- View video images directly on VigorSwitch WUI
- Offer remote IP video products maintenance

ONVIF devices can be centralized and managed remotely via VigorSwitch. With a hierarchy view, the administrator can manage several ONVIF devices and check abnormal traffic detected by Vigor system.

III-1-1 Status

The status (including port enabled, traffic, downlink, etc.) of the IP cameras and NVRs (Network Video Recorders) can be seen on this page.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Discovery	Enable - If enabled, VigorSwitch will automatically detect ONVIF devices, recognize third party IP cameras and NVR and integrate ONVIF device(s) to form surveillance network.Disable - Disable the function of Discovery.
Default Username / Default Password	Enter a name / password as the default value.In the entire ONVIF Surveillance menu, VigorSwitch will input this value in advanced and retrieve data. System administrator can access the IP device in which the username and password are as same as the default values.However, you can also input another username/ passwordmanually if the IP device username/ password is different from the one you enter in Default Username/ Default Password.
Group Specify a group for	displaying group information and device information under the selected group.Or, choose the default setting, All, to display information for all groups.
PoE / PoE Error	PoE - Display the number of LAN PoE device(s) connected to VigorSwitch.PoE Error - Display the number of LAN PoE device(s) disconnected.
NVR Display the number of	NVR device(s) connected to VigorSwitch. The panel sketch on the screen will display which LAN port that the NVR device connected.
CAM	Display the number of IP camera(s) connected to VigorSwitch. The panel sketch on the screen will display which LAN port that the IP camera connected.
Group Information
Total Group Display the total number of groups.
+Add New Group A group	can contain one (IP camera or NVR, as group leader) to several devices (IP cameras as group devices).Click the button to create a new group for managing multiple devices.Step (1) - The first page allows you to configure general settings for a new group.

● Group Name - Enter the name of a group.
- Group by - The system will detect the NVR or IP cameras, and list them on the field of NVR or Group Leader.
- NVR/Group Leader - Select an IP device. For the vedio from IP camera will be recorded on an NVR device, it is suggested to assign an NVR as the group leader.
- Group Device - This field lists all devices (IP cameras) not included by other group. Select one IP device to multiple devices or select all the devices for managed by this group.
- ONVIF Device Admin Username/Password - When the group members share the same username and password, enter the username and password in these two field for administration.
● Next - Click it to access into next page.

Step (2) - The second page allows you to configure throughput threshold for the group port. It is helpful for the system administrator to make the corresponding process if encountered abnormal situation.

• Apply to All Member Ports - Check the box to apply the throughput threshold setting to all member ports.
• GE# Ingress Threshold Mailalert - Click Enable to set the ingress limit value. When the incoming traffic (packet) of the GE port reaches the limit, the Vigor System will send an alert email to the system administrator.
  ■ GE# Ingress Rate - If enabling the ingress threshold alert, enter the ingress rate as a threshold to send mail alert.
• GE# Egress Threshold Mailalert - Click Enable to set the egress limit value. When the outgoing traffic (packet) of the GE port reaches the limit, the Vigor System will send an alert email to the system administrator.
  ■ GE# Egress Rate - If enabling the egress threshold alert, enter the egress rate as a threshold to send mail alert.
• OK - Save the configuration and exit the box.
• Cancel - Exit the box without saving the configuration.

Device Information

Modify Click it to modify the settings of the selected IP device.

III-1-2 Throughput Threshold

This page is used for set throughput threshold for multiple ONVIF devices managed by VigorSwitch.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports Specify one to several GE ports which will be limited by the threshold configured here.
Ingress Threshold Mailalert	Disable - No mail alert will be sent out.Enable - When the ingress rate reaches the threshold configured here, Vigor system will send alert mail to specified mail address.Ingress Rate (Kbps) - Enter a value as the threshold of ingress packets.
Egress Threshold Mailalert	Disable - No mail alert will be sent out.Enable - When the egress rate reaches the threshold configured here, Vigor system will send alert mail to specified mail address.Egress Rate (Kbps)- Enter a value as the threshold of engress packets.
Apply Save the settings or changes to the switch.
Modify Click it to modify the settings for the selected GE port / LAG port.

III-2 Video

On this page, users may directly view images captured from the specified IP camera.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Group	Specify a group which contains the IP camera you want to check.
Camera List Search - Enter	the device name of the IP camera for searching and displaying on this field.
Video Preview After authenticated with correct username and password, the image of the specified IP camera (supported by VigorSwitch) will be shown immediately.	Username / Password - The default username/ password will be input if it is configured on the Topology page. However, if the default input is not the correct username/ password, enter the correct one of the IP camera instead.
	Login - Click it to authenticate the username and password for the specified IP camera.
	Live Streaming - Display the streaming URI of the IP camera.

III-3 Device Maintenance

The system administrator can remotely configure time setting and reboot the devices (IP cameras or NVRs) managed by VigorSwitch.

III-3-1 General

This page displays the information (e.g., device online, device name, etc.), time and date and the device action for a selected IP device (e.g., IP camera). Meanwhile, this page allows configuring settings for ping check of IP camera or NVR.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Device List Search - Enter	a string to search the IP device you want.Usage / Password - The default username/ password will be input if it is configured on the Topology page. However, if the default input is not the correct username/ password, enter the correct one of the IP device instead.Login - Click it to authenticate the username and password.Later, current network settings related to this device will be shown on the screen.
Device Information Display	the information related to the selected device.- Click it to modify the device name.

Time and Date Display the	time and date information related to the selected device. - Click it to modify the time setting for the device.
Device Action Display the	action performed by IP-based device. Factory Default - Click the Apply button to rest the factory default to the IP device. Reboot - Click the Apply button to reboot the IP device immediately.
Device Check -- Configure settings for ping check of IP camera or NVR.
Method	Auto detect - Ping check of the IP c automatically. It depends on the discovery function. Manual Ping Check - Ping check of the IP camera or NVR manually.
Port Display the port number of the IP device
Enable	Enable - Click it to enable the device ping check function. Disable - Click it to disable the function.
Failure Action	Configure the power behavior for each LAN port. Power Cycle - Once the device is offline, Vigorswitch will power off the device and then power on the device again. Power Off - When the device is offline, power off the device immediately. Nothing - When the device is offline, no action will be Note: When a PoE hub connecting to LAN port of VigorSwitch, the power behavior (on/off) to the PoE hub also will apply to all the devices connecting to the PoE hub.
Mail Alert Enable - When the device is offline, Vigor system will send an alert mail to notify the receiptant. ● Mail with Snapshot - If enabled, the switch will try to get snapshot from the device per half hour. Before using this feature, set the group authentication information when adding group or configure Default Username/Password in the Topology page first. Disable - When the device is offline, no action will be

	performed.
Apply Save the settings or	changes to the switch.

III-3-2 Network

This page displays the network settings of the specified device (IP CAM or NVR).

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Device List Search - Enter	a string to search the device you want.Usage / Password - The default username/ password will be input if it is configured on the Topology page. However, if the default input is not the correct username/ password, enter the correct one of the IP device instead.Login - Click it to authenticate the username and password.Later, current network settings related to this device will be shown on the screen.
Mode Change the connection mode for this device.Static - When it is selected, you have to enter value for network setting manually for the IP device.IP Address - Enter an IPv4 address for the IP devicePrefix Length - Specify the subnet mask for the IP address.Gateway - Enter the IPv4 address for the gateway.DNS Server1/2 - Enter the IP address for primary / secondary DNS server.DHCP - When it is selected, the IP device will be assigned with the settings by the network's DHCP server automatically to access the Internet.Hostname - Display the hostname of the DHCP server.
Zero Configuration Enable	- The network settings for the IP device will be
	configured automatically.Disable - The network settings for the IP devcie must be configured manually.
Apply Save the settings or	changes to the switch.

III-3-3 Security

This page displays the security settings of the specified IP device (IP CAM or NVR).

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Device List Search - Enter	a string to search the device you want.Usage / Password - The default username/ password will be input if it is configured on the Topology page. However, if the default input is not the correct username/ password, enter the correct one of the IP device instead.Login - Click it to authenticate the username and password.Later, current network settings related to this device will be shown on the screen.
HTTP Ports Current HTTP	port number of the IP device is shown in this field.Enable - Click it to enable the HTTP port configuration and enter a port value if required.Disable - Disable the HTTP port configuration.
HTTPS Ports Current HTTPS	port number of the IP device is shown in this field.Enable - Click it to enable the HTTPS port configuration and enter a port value if required.Disable - Disable the HTTPS port configuration.
RTSP Ports Current RTSP	port number of the IP device is shown in this field.Enable - Click it to enable the RTSP port configuration and enter a port value if required.Disable - Disable the RTSP port configuration.
Apply Save the settings or	changes to the switch.

Part IV VLAN Routing

IV-1 Property

With the function of VLAN routing of VigorSwitch, computers (or clients) under different VLANs can access to the Internet and share data or information for each other.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
State	Enable - Enable the function of VLAN routing to communicate IP addresses within different VLAN group.Disable - Disable the function of VLAN routing.

IV-2 Interface Setting

When VLAN Routing is enabled (on VLAN Routing>>Property), different VLANs can communicate for each other.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
VLAN ID	Before choosing, you have to create VLAN profiles on VLAN Management >> Create VLAN first.Use the drop down list to select one VLAN ID.
Description Enter a brief comment for the VLAN ID.
IP Address Enter the IP address for the selected VLAN ID.
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for the IP address set above.
Apply Save the settings or changes to the switch.
Modify	- click it to modify the settings for the selected entry.- click it to remove the selected entry.

IV-3 Static Route

Static routing is a process that the system network administrator can configure the network with all the required information for packet forwarding. Each VLAN can include several IP address with the same subnet. The network administrator can specify some IP addresses (with different subnets) and different VLANs for establishing a communication channel.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Action	Add - Create a new static route.Delete - Remove an existing static route.
Destination IP Address Enter an IP address.
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for the above IP address.
Next Hop	Select Gateway or Interface to enter the IP address or choose VLAN ID number.
Gateway IP Address	It is available when Gateway is selected as the Next Hop.Enter the IP address of the gateway.
Interface	It is available when Interface is selected as the Next Hop.Use the drop down list to specify the VLAN ID number.
Apply Save the settings or changes to the switch.
Modify	- Click it to modify the settings for the selected entry.- Click it to remove the selected entry.

Part V Security

V-1 RADIUS

This page allows the network administrator to add and configure multiple RADIUS servers.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Use Default Parameters Retries - The retry time before this server being considered not-reachable.Timeout for Reply - Set the time (in seconds) before this server being considered lost connection.Key String - Enter the string used to encrypt and authenticate with RADIUS server.Apply - Save the settings.
Add RADIUS Server Address Type - Specify whether switch uses a hostname to resolve address by DNS to connect to server, or directly connect using IPv4 address.Sever Address - Enter the server's address corresponding with address type given.Server Port - Enter the port number used by RADIUS server.Accounting Port - Enter a port number to receive the information related to the user/ device authenticated by the RADIUS server. The collected information will be used for network monitoring or statistics.Priority - Specify the priority that switch uses this server. The higher number, the lower priority. Switch will start with server with lowest priority.Retry - Set the time before this server being considered not-reachableTimeout - Set the time (in seconds) before this server being considered lost connection.Key String - Enter the key string used for encrypting and authenticating with server. Unless Key String is specified here, the default string will be used.Usage -Specify whether you would like to use this server for switch login authentication or 802.1x access port

authentication, or both.

Add - Click it to add a new RADIUS server and display in this page.

under Edit- Click it to modify the priority setting for the selected GE port / LAG port.

V-2 TACACS+

This page allows the network administrator to add and configure multiple TACACS+ server.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Use Default Parameters	Timeout -Set the time (in seconds) before this server being considered lost connection.Key String - Enter the string used to encrypt and authenticate with TACACS+ server.Apply - Save the settings.
Add TACACS+ Server Address Type - Specify whether switch use a hostname to resolve address by DNS to connect to server, or directly connect using IPv4 address.Sever Address - Enter the server's address corresponding with address type given.Server Port - Enter the port number used by TACACS+ server.Priority - Specify the priority that switch uses this server. The higher number, the lower priority. Switch will start with server with lowest priority.Timeout -Set the time (in seconds) before this server being considered lost connection.Key String - Enter the key string used for encrypting and authenticating with server. Unless Key String is specified here, the default string will be used.Add - Click it to add a new RADIUS server and display in this page.under Edit- Click it to modify the priority setting for the selected GE port / LAG port.

V-3 Management Access Authentication

V-3-1 Method Profile

This page allows a user to create method list for applying on management service.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Method Profile Name - Enter a name for creating a method.Optional Methods - Available methods include Local, RADIUS and TACACS+.Selected Methods - The method listed in this field will be applied for such method profile.Add - Click it to add a method from Optional Method onto Selected Method.
under Edit	Click it to modify the optional methods/ selected methods for the selected profile.

V-3-2 Application Authentication

This page allows the network administrator to select the customized Method List to apply to any management service, for management access control.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Application There are five	methods to be configured with different profile respectively.● Console/ Telnet/ SSH/ HTTP/ HTTPS
Selected Profile Specify one of customized method profiles to apply to any management service, for management access control.
Apply Save the settings.

V-4 Management Access Control

V-4-1 Management Access Control Profile (ACL)

This page allows a user to add, edit, and delete Management Access Control profiles.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
ACL Name Enter a name to create a profile for ACL.Once a profile is created, it will be displayed on this page.
Add Click it to create a new ACL profile after entering the ACL name.
ACL Profile Name Display the name of the ACL profile.
State Display if such ACL profile is active or inactive.
Rule Display the number of ACE used by this ACL profile.
Activate / Deactivate	- Click it to activate / deactivate such entry.To configure detailed settings for the selected ACL profile, do not click Activate for that profile.
Delete Click the icon under Delete to remove the selected entry.

V-4-2 Management Access Control Entries (ACE)

This page allows a user to add, edit, or remove Access Control Entries (ACE) of the Management Access Control profiles. However, only the ACE of inactive profiles can be modified, and before configuring ACE, at least one ACL profile should be created.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
ACL Profile Name Use the	drop-down list to select the inactive ACL profile you would like to modify.
Priority	Specify a priority number (1 to 65535) for such rule. The lower the number, the higher the priority.
Service Choose the service type you would like to control the access.
Action Select the action to be taken on the traffic of selected service type.Deny - Incoming / outgoing data which meets ACE rules will be blocked.Permit - Incoming / outgoing data which meets ACE rule is allowed to pass through.
Ports Select the ports to which the ACL should be applied.
IP Versions Specify the IP address/ subnet to which the ACL should be applied.• All - All the IP address should be applied.• IPv4 - Specify the IPv4 address / subnet.• IPv6 -Specify the IPv6 address / subnet.
IPv4 Enter the IPv4 address/ subnet to which the ACE rule should apply.
IPv6 Enter the IPv6 address/ subnet to which the ACE rule should apply.
Add Click it to create an ACE rule profile.Then, such ACE rule profile will be shown on the table below.

Edit

- click it to modify the settings for the selected entry.

- click it to remove the selected entry.

V-5 802.1X/MAC Authentication

The authentication manager allows you to configure securely access from any host connected to physical ports. You may apply multiple ways of authentication to each port.

V-5-1 Properties

V-5-1-1 Global Settings

VigorSwitch P2100 supports 802.1x and MAC-based authentication methods. In Global Settings page, you can specify authentication type, enable Guest VLAN function, specify a VID and select format for MAC address entry.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Global Settings Authentication Types - Use the drop down list to specify which type (802.1x, MAC-based) will be used for authentication. Choose to enable 802.1x or MAC-based authenticate method for host connecting to Ethernet port. You may configure which type to be used per port, but enabling any per port without enabling here will not be effective.Guest VLAN - Check to enable a Guest VLAN for those have not successfully authenticated with any given methods. Choose one of the VLAN ID as a Guest VLAN.Selected VID - If Guest VLAN is enabled, use the drop down list to specify one VID number.MAC-Based User ID Format -Specify how the MAC-based user ID should be expressed in EAP message between AAA server and switch.Apply - Click it to save the settings.
Apply Save and activate the settings configured above.

V-5-1-2 Port Authentication Setting

This page allows the network administrator to configure detailed authentication settings for each port.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Apply Settings to Ports	Select physical port(s) for applying settings.Note that port authentication will not be effective if none of them were enabled.
Authentication Types Enabled	Select 802.1x and/ or MAC-based authenticate method for host connecting to this port.
Host Mode Multiple Authentication	ntication - Each host are authenticated individually.Multiple Hosts - Authentication is done on port basis, only one authenticated host is required; other hosts connected to this port can access freely as authenticated host.Single Host - Only one host can be authenticated, and access the port.
Available Authentication Types	Display available authentication types of AAA server (or local) you wish to have on this port.
Selected Authentication Types	Specify the order of authentication type you wish to have on this port.
Available Methods	Display available methods of AAA server (or local) you wish to have on this port.
Selected Methods Specify	the order of authentication methods you wish to have on this port.
Guest VLAN	Check Enable to enable Guest VLAN on this port for those didn't authenticated successfully.
RADIUS VLAN Assignment	Disable - Switch will ignore the VLAN assignment from the RADIUS server and keep the original VLAN of the host.Static - Switch will use the VLAN assignment from the RADIUS server if it receives the information. If there is not VLAN information, it will keep the original VLAN of the host.Reject - Switch will reject the host if it does not receive the VLAN information from RADIUS server.

Apply The modification made above can be applied on to the selected GE port immediately.

V-5-2 Port Control/Settings

This page allows the network administrator to controls port setting, based on 802.1X, for ethernet port authentication.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports Select the ports to modify the port control settings.
Port Control	Specify if you wish this account to be allowed (Authorized) or blocked (Unauthorized) or determined by VigorSwtich (Auto).● Disabled - Disable any authentication requirement for port access. All clients are allowed to access the network.● Force Authorized- Port will be considered authorized. All clients are allowed to access the network.● Force Unauthorized - Port will be considered un-authorized. All clients are NOT allowed to access the network.● Auto - Port will be considered authorized or unauthorized based on the authentication results of the host.
Periodic Reauthentication	Enable - The hosts via the selected GE port will be re-authenticated periodically.
Max Hosts If Multiple Authentication mode is selected as Host Mode (802.1X/ MAC Authentication>>Properties>>Port Authentication Setting), the total number of hosts cannot exceed the maximum number of hosts configured here.
Reauthentication Period	Enter a time period. When the time is up, the host shall return to initial state and prepare to pass authentication procedure again. Default is 3600 seconds.
Inactivate Timeout When	there is no packet coming from the authenticated host, the system will start the inactive timer. After inactive timeout, the host will be unauthorized and corresponding session will be deleted. In Multiple Hosts mode (configured in 802.1X/ MAC Authentication>>Properties>>Port Authentication Setting), the packet is counted on the authorized host only and not all packets on the port.
Quiet Period When a GE port	port is disabled just because authentication fails several times, the host connected to that port will be blocked for a period of time configured in quiet period.Later, after the time period set in this field, the host will be allowed to perform authentication again.
Resend EAP Period (802.1X Parameter)	Set the period for host to re-send EAP (Ethernet Automatic Protection) requests.Default value is 30 (seconds).
Supplicant Timeout(802.1X Parameter)	Set a period of time for the maximum number of EAP requests will be sent.If a response from the host is not received by VigorSwitch after the defined period (supplicant timeout), the authentication process will be started again.
Server Timeout (802.1X Parameter)	Set a period of time for the server. The EAP requests shall be resent to the supplicant within the time; otherwise, the time setting will lapse and the requests won’t be sent out.
MAX EAP Request (802.1X Parameter)	Set the maximum time interval for EAP request sent out.
Apply The modification made above can be applied on to the selected GE port immediately.

V-5-3 MAC-Based Local Account

This page allows the network administrator to create profiles by entering MAC address of the hosts to be authenticated.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the host.
Port Control Specify a control type for the host.
VLAN	User Defined - Check it to specify which VLAN will be by the host of this account.
Reauthentication Period	User Defined - Check it to specify the time this account required to be authenticated again after authentication taken place.
Inactive Timeout User Defined - Check it to specify the time of inactive this account becoming log-off.
Add Click it to create a new account.
Edit It is available when there is one profile existed.

V-5-4 Authenticated Hosts

This page displays information related to the host authenticated by VigorSwitch.

V-5-5 Accounting

This page allows the network administrator to authenticate the client via RADIUS server.

After enabling the accounting service, VigorSwitch will periodically transmit information related to the authenticated user or device to the RADIUS server to comprehend the usage records of the user/device for the purposes of network monitoring or billed accordingly.

At present, VigorSwitch supports and sends the following attributes to specified RADIUS server.

• NAS-IP-Address
• Called-Station-Id
• NAS-Identifier
• NAS-Port-Type
• User-Name
• Acct-Session-Id
• Acct-Status-Type
• Acct-Input-Octets
• Acct-Output-Octets
• Acct-Input-Gigawords
• Acct-Output-Gigawords

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
State	Enable - Enable the authentication made by the RADIUS server.Disable - Disable the function.
Server	RADIUS - At present, only RADIUS server can be used for authentication.
Disconnect Message Port	Enter a port number (1~65535) to notify the system administration the disconnection of RADIUS server.
Update Period Enter the up	update period (1~60) for authentication.

V-6 Port Security

This page allows the network administrator to configure security settings for each port interface (GE port / LAG group). When port security is enabled for each interface, released action will be performed once detecting that the number of MAC address exceeds the limit.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
State Enable or disable port security function on the switch. Enabled - Enable the port security function. Disabled - Disable the port security function.
Ports	Select the port(s) you would like to configure the port security settings.
Port State Enable or disable port security function on the ports selected above. Enabled - The selected port applies the port security settings. Disabled - The selected port does not apply the port security settings.
Max. No. of Address Allowed	Enter the maximum number of MAC addresses that the port is allowed to learn.
Action Select an action.	Forward- Forward a packet from new devices, or device that's not on the static MAC address list. Discard- Discard a packet from new devices, or device that's not on the static MAC address list. Shutdown- Shutdown this port when receiving a packet from new devices, or device that's not on the static MAC address list, and the packet will be discarded.
Apply The modification made above can be applied on to the selected GE/ LAG port immediately.

Modify

- click it to modify the settings for the selected entry.

V-7 Storm Control

Storm Control helps to suppress possible broadcast, unknown multicast or unknown unicast storm by applying a rate limit on those packets.

V-7-1 Properties

This page allows a user to configure general settings for Storm Control.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Storm Control Mode Select	the mode of storm control.
	Packet/sec - Storm control rate will be calculated by packet-based.
	Kbits/sec - Storm control rate will be calculated by octet-based.
Preamble & Inter Frame Gap	Select the rate calculation with/ without preamble & IFG (20 bytes).
	Excluded - Exclude preamble & IFG (20 bytes) when count ingress storm control rate.
	Included - Include preamble & IFG (20 bytes) when count ingress storm control rate.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

V-7-2 Port Setting

This page allows the network administrator to configure port settings for Storm Control. The configuration result for each port will be displayed on the table listed on the lower side of this web page.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports Use the drop down list to select the port profile (GE1 to GE10).
Storm Control Disable - Disable the storm control configuration for the selected port profile. Enable - Enable the storm control configuration for the selected port profile.
Limiting Rate Check the box(es) to enable strom control rate limited for Broadcast, Unknown Multicast and/or Unknown Unicast packet. Broadcast - Specify the storm control rate for Broadcast packet. Value of storm control rate, Unit: Kbps (Kbits per-second). The range is from 16 to 1000000. Unknown Multicast - Specify the storm control rate for unknown multicast packet. Value of storm control rate, Unit: Kbps (Kbits per-second). The range is from 16 to 1000000. Unknown Unicast - Specify the storm control rate for unknown multicast packet. Value of storm control rate, Unit: Kbps (Kbits per-second). The range is from 16 to 1000000.
Action Select the state of setting. Drop - Packets exceed storm control rate will be dropped. Shutdown - Port exceeds storm control rate will be shutdown.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

V-8 DoS

A Denial of Service (DoS) attack is a hacker attempt to make a device unavailable to its users. DoS attacks saturate the device with external communication requests, so that it cannot respond to legitimate traffic. These attacks usually lead to a device CPU overload.

The DoS protection feature is a set of predefined rules that protect the network from malicious attacks. The DoS Security Suite Setting enables activating the security suite.

V-8-1 Properties

This page allows a user to configure DoS setting to enable/disable DoS function for global setting.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Dst MAC=Src MAC Drop the packets if the destination MAC address is equal to the source MAC address. Disabled - Disable the item function. Enabled - Enable the item function.
LAND Drop the packets if the source IP address is equal to the destination IP address. Disabled - Disable the item function. Enabled - Enable the item function.
UDP Blat Drop the packets if the UDP source port equals to the UDP destination port. Disabled - Disable the item function. Enabled - Enable the item function.
TCP Blat Drop the packages if the TCP source port is equal to the TCP destination port. Disabled - Disable the item function.
	Enabled - Enable the item function.
Ping of Death Avoid ping of death attack.Ping packets that length are larger than 65535 bytes.Disabled - Disable the item function.Enabled - Enable the item function.
IPv6 Min Fragments Check the minimum size of IPv6 fragments, and drop the packets smaller than the minimum size. The valid range is from 0 to 65535 bytes, and default value is 1240 bytes.Disabled - Disable the item function.Enabled - Enable the item function.
ICMP Fragments Drop the fragmented ICMP packets.Disabled - Disable the item function.Enabled - Enable the item function.
IPv4 Ping Max Size Determine the IPv4 PING packet with the length.Disabled - Disable the item function.Enabled - Enable the item function.-
IPv6 Ping Max Size Determine the IPv6 PING packet with the length.Disabled - Disable the item function.Enabled - Enable the item function.
Ping Max Size Setting Determine the IPv4/ IPv6 PING packet with the length. Specify the maximum size of the ICMPv4/ ICMPv6 ping packets. The valid range is from 0 to 65535 bytes, and the default value is 512 bytes.
Smurf Attack	Avoid smurf attack. The length range of the netmask is from 0 to 323 bytes, and default length is 0 byte.Disabled - Disable the item function.Enabled - Enable the item function.
TCP Min Hdr Size Check the minimum TCP header and drops the TCP packets with the header smaller than the minimum size. The length range is from 0 to 31 bytes, and default length is 20 bytes.Disabled - Disable the item function.Enabled - Enable the item function.
TCP-SYN (SPORT<1024) Drop SYN packets with sport less than 1024.Disabled - Disable the item function.Enabled - Enable the item function.
Null Scan Attack Drop the packets with NULL scan.Disabled - Disable the item function.Enabled - Enable the item function.
X-mas Scan Attack Drop the packets if the sequence number is zero, and the FIN, URG and PSH bits are set.Disabled - Disable the item function.Enabled - Enable the item function.
TCP SYN-FIN Attack Drop the packets with SYN and FIN bits set.Disabled - Disable the item function.Enabled - Enable the item function.-
TCP SYN-RST Attack Drop the packets with SYN and RST bits set.Disabled - Disable the item function.
TCP Fragment (Offset=1)	Drop the fragmented ICMP packets. Disabled - Disable the item function. Enabled - Enable the item function.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

V-8-2 DoS Port Setting

This page allows a user to configure and display the state of DoS protection for interfaces. The configuration result for each port will be displayed on the table listed on the lower side of this web page.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Port	Use the drop down list to select the port profile (GE1 to GE10) or profiles.
DoS Protection Disabled	Disable the function of DoS Protection. Enabled - Enable the function of DoS Protection.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Modify	- Click it to modify settings.

V-9 Dynamic ARP Inspection

Dynamic ARP inspection (DAI) can prevent ARP spoofing attacks by validating ARP packet in a network. It can intercept, record, and discard ARP packets with invalid IP-to-MAC address bindings; and then protect the network against malicious attacks.

V-9-1 Properties

V-9-1-1 Global Property Settings

This page allows a user to configure global property settings for the function of Dynamic ARP Inspection.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
State	Enable - Check the box to enable global property settings.
VLANs Select VLAN profile(s) to apply the function of Dynamic ARP Inspection.Only the GE/ LAG port within the selected VLAN will apply DAI function.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

V-9-1-2 Per Port Property Settings

This page allows a user to configure detailed settings of DAI for each port (GE/LAG).

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports	Use the drop down list to select the port (GE1 to GE10, LAG1 to LAG4) or ports for applying DAI function.
Trust	Enable – Enable the function of DAI for the port(s) selected above.
Source MAC Address Enable	- Check it to enable the function of source MAC address validation mechanism for the selected port(s).
Destination MAC Address	Enable - Check it to enable the function of destination MAC address validation mechanism for the selected port(s).
IP Address Enable - Check	it to enable the function of IP address validation mechanism for the selected port(s).Allow Zero - The IP address of “0.0.0.0” can be applied to the selected port(s) if it is enabled.
Rate Limit	Use the drop down list to choose a rate limitation value (0~50) for the selected port(s).
Apply Apply the settings to	the switch.

V-9-2 Statistics

This page displays all statistics recorded by Dynamic ARP Inspection function.

V-10 DHCP Snooping

DHCP snooping is able to validate DHCP messages obtained from untrusted sources and filter out invalid message.

For DHCP snooping to function properly, it is suggested to connect DHCP servers to VigorSwitch through trusted interfaces; because untrusted DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted interfaces only.

V-10-1 Properties

V-10-1-1 Global Property Settings

This page allows a user to configure global property settings for the function of DHCP snooping Inspection.

In default, DHCP snooping is inactive on all VLANs. You can enable such feature on a single VLAN or a range of VLANs.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
State	Enable - Check the box to enable global property settings.
VLANs Select VLAN profile(s) to apply the function of DHCP Snooping Inspection.Only the GE/ LAG port within the selected VLAN will apply DHCP Snooping function.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

V-10-1-2 Per Port Property Settings

This page allows a user to configure detailed settings of DHCP Snooping for each port (GE/ LAG).

Any device that is not in the service provider network will be regarded as an untrusted source (such as a customer switch). Host ports are untrusted sources. In VigorSwitch, you can assign a source as trusted device by configuring the trust state of its connecting port.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports	Use the drop down list to select the port (GE1 to GE10, LAG1 to LAG4) or ports for applying DHCP snooping function.
Trust	Enable - Check it to make the port(s) selected above as trusted interface.
Verify Chaddr Enable - Check it to enable chaddr (client hardware address) validation of GE/ LAG port. All DHCP packets will be checked if the client hardware MAC address is the same as source MAC in Ethernet header or not. Default is disabled.
Rate Limit Input rate limitation (0~300) of DHCP packets. The unit is “pps”. “0” means unlimited.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

V-10-2 Statistics

This page displays all statistics recorded by DHCP snooping function.

V-10-3 Option82 Property

You can use information settings including Remote ID and Circuit ID for Option82 Property, also known as the DHCP relay agent, to protect VigorSwitch against spoofing attacks.

V-10-3-1 Global Option 82 Property Settings

This page allows a user to set string as remote ID for DHCP option82. For example, use a switch-configured hostname or specify an ASCII text string as remote ID.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Remote ID	The string specified here is used to identify the remote host.User Defined - Check it and manually enter ASCII text string in the entry box.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

V-10-3-2 Per Port Option82 Property Settings

This page allows a user to configure detailed settings of DHCP Snooping, Option82 for each port (GE/LAG).

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports	Use the drop down list to select the port (GE1 to GE10, LAG1 to LAG4) or ports for applying DHCP snooping, Option82 Property function.
State	Enable - Check it to make the port(s) selected above apply the settings configured in this page.
Allow Untrust Untrusted packets detected by VigorSwitch will be performed by the action determined here.Keep - Packets are allowed to pass through.Drop - Packets are blocked and discarded.Replace - Packets will be replaced.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

V-10-4 Option82 Circuit ID

This page allows a user to set string as circuit ID for DHCP option82 setting. Circuit ID shall be combined with VLAN name (or VLAN ID number) and interface name (GE/LAG port).

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports	Use the drop down list to select the port (GE1 to GE10, LAG1 to LAG4) or ports for applying DHCP snooping, Option82 Property function.
VLAN	Choose a number as VLAN ID which is easy to be identified for a packet containing with it.It is optional setting.
Circuit ID Enter ASCII text	string in the entry box. Later, any packet passes through the specified interface (GE/ LAG port) will be inserted with such information.
Add Click it to create a profile.
Edit	- click it to modify the circuit ID value for the selected entry.- click it to remove the selected entry.

V-11 IP Source Guard

By using the source IP address filtering function, IP source guard can prevent a malicious host from feigning a legal host with its IP address and performing malicious attack.

V-11-1 Port Settings

IP source guard is a port-based feature. Therefore, it is necessary to configure detailed settings for each GE/LAG port interface separately.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports	Use the drop down list to select the port (GE1 to GE10, LAG1 to LAG4) or ports for applying IP source guard function.
State	Enable - Check it to make the port(s) selected above apply the settings configured in this page.
Verify Source Specify the type of source IP for the packet coming from.IP - Only the packet with specified IP address will be verified.IP-MAC - Only the packet with specified IP address and MAC address will be verified.
Max Entry Define the number (0~50) for the port.The default is 0 (no limit).
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

V-11-2 IMPV Binding

This page allows the network administrator to set the filtering conditions (binding type, MAC address, IPv4 address) for packets through the specified LAN port.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports	Use the drop down list to select the port (GE1 to GE10, LAG1 to LAG4) or ports for applying IMPV Binding function.
VLAN	Choose a number as VLAN ID which is easy to be identified for a packet containing with it.It is optional setting.
Binding Select the binding	type for such feature.IP-MAC-Port-VLAN - Packets will be allowed to pass through the port interface if they meet the conditions specified by IP address, MAC address, Port setting and VLAN ID setting.IP-Port-VLAN - Packets will be allowed to pass through the port interface if they meet the conditions specified by IP address, Port setting and VLAN ID setting.
MAC Address Enter the MAC	address of the device connecting to the port interface selected above.
IPv4 Address Enter the IP	address with mask address of the device connecting to the port interface selected above.
Add Click it to create a new binding profile.
Edit	- Click it to modify the settings for the selected entry.

- click it to remove the selected entry.

V-12 IP Conflict Prevention

V-12-1 IP Conflict Detection

This page allows you to enable the function of IP conflict detection.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
IP Conflict Detection	Enable - Click it to activate the function of IP conflict detection. The detected result will be shown on Protected Hosts Table.Disable - Click it to deactivate the function of IP conflict detection.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Clear Clear the settings.
Modify	- Click it to remove the selected entry.

V-12-2 IP Conflict Prevention

A user can configure IP addresses for network devices manually. However, it might result in conflict between different devices due to using the same IP address, and cause the devices not working correctly.

This page allows you to prevent IP conflict by binding the port with the specified IP address.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
IP Conflict Prevention Setup Wizard	Quick Start Wizard - The system will guide to bind server port with an IP address step by step.Step 1Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

After clicking OK, the IP address specified for the GE port will be unavailable for other network devices.

IP Prevention	Enable - Click it to activate the function of IP prevention. Disable - Click it to deactivate the function of IP prevention.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Clear Remove all settings of IP source guard DHCP snooping and dynamic ARP inspection.
Modify	- Click it to modify the settings for the selected entry.

or

Port Type - There are four selections - DHCP Client, Static Binding, Multiple Hosts and DHCP Server. Each type will bring out different IP address(es) settings.

OK - Click it to save the settings.

- Click it to remove the selected entry.

V-13 Loop Protection

Loop event might be caused due to wrong hardware connection. VigorSwitch will periodically send packets out to check if they loopback or not. This page allows you to set conditions and perform an action when VigorSwitch detects the looped packet.

V-13-1 Global Property Settings

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
State	Enable- VigorSwitch detects the loop event of GE ports/ LAG ports automatically.Disable- VigorSwitch will not detect the loop event.
Transmission Time When the loop event occurred, VigorSwitch will perform the action after a period of time.
Action When the switch detects loop situation occurred to a port; it will perform the action selected in this field.Log- The switch will record such event as a log.Shutdown Port- The switch will shut down the port.Shutdown Port and Log- The switch will shut down the port and record the event as a log. The system administrator will view the content from system log.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

V-13-2 Per Port Settings

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports Select the port(s) to	apply the specified action.
Status	Disable - Select to disable the loop protection function for the selected port(s).
Action When the switch detects loop situation occurred to a port; it will perform the action selected in this field.Follow Global Setting - If it is selected, the selected port will be applied with the settings configured in Global Property Setting.Log - The switch will record such event as a log.Shutdown Port - The switch will shut down the port.Shutdown Port and Log - The switch will shut down the port and record the event as a log. The system administrator will view the content from system log.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

This page is left blank.

Part VI ACL Configuration

VI-1 Create ACL

An Access Control List (ACL) is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses, MAC addresses, or other more specific criteria. This switch tests ingress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one. A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule, or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule. If no rules match, the frame is accepted.

VI-1-1 MAC

The function is used to show the Access Control List (ACL) based on Layer 2 filtering, the MAC layer. The ACL is composed by many Access Control Element (ACE) rules. You can create a new ACL here; then add multiple ACEs.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
ACL Profile Name Enter a	name for creating a new ACL profile.
Add Add a new ACL entry using given ACL name.
Action	- click it to remove the selected entry.

VI-1-2 IPv4

The function is used to show the Access Control List (ACL) based on Layer 2 to Layer 4 filtering, the IPv4. The ACL is composed by many Access Control Element (ACE) rules. You may create a new ACL here; then add multiple ACEs.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
ACL Profile Name Enter a	name for creating a new ACL profile.
Add Add a new ACL entry using given ACL name.
Action	- click it to remove the selected entry.

VI-1-3 IPv6

The function is used to show the Access Control List (ACL) based on Layer 2 to Layer 4 filtering, the IPv6. The ACL is composed by many Access Control Element (ACE) rules. You may create a new ACL here; then add multiple ACEs.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
ACL Profile Name Enter a	name for creating a new ACL profile.
Add Add a new ACL entry using given ACL name.
Action	- click it to remove the selected entry.

VI-2 Create ACE

Since ACL based on MAC, IPv4 and/or IPv4 has been created on the section of IV-1, now you can add multiple ACE rules for each ACL.

VI-2-1 MAC

This page shows ACE based on MAC address. You may choose ACL, permit, and deny particular packet or frame, even shutdown the port.

You may provide filtering/matching criteria for one or more of packet characteristic (such as Source/ Destination MAC, Ethertype, VLAN, 802.1p) for this ACE to identify the packet.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
ACL Profile Name Use the	drop down list to selected one of the user defined ACL profiles.
Sequence	Assign a sequence number to this ACE. The sequence is used to identify which one of ACEs in an ACL is firstly used to match ingress packets. The switch port bound with an ACL use the contained ACE rules, start with the one with lower sequence number to match the packet first.
Action Select the action applied to the packet matched this ACE. Permit or deny the packets into switch core, or shutdown the port for stopping further transmission.● Permit● Deny● Shutdown
Source MAC / Destination MAC	Specify the source and the destination MAC address for filtering.Any - All packets will be filtered.Or, enter the IP address to filter the packets coming from that address.
Ethertype Specify ethernet	type for filtering.Select Any.Or, enter the value with the format of “0x600 ~ 0xFFFF”.
VLAN Specify VLAN profile	for filtering.Select Any.Or, enter a VLAN number. The packets coming from the VLAN specified here will be filtered by Vigor device.
802.1p Specify the 802.1p	priority value for filtering. Select Any, or a number from 0 to 7.
Add Click it to create a new ACE rule.
Modify	[W407] - click it to modify the settings for the selected entry.
	- click it to remove the selected entry.

VI-2-2 IPv4

This page shows ACE based on IPv4 address. You may choose ACL, permit, and deny particular packet or frame, even shutdown the port.

You may provide filtering/ matching criteria for one or more of following packet characteristic (such as Protocol over the IP layer, Source/ Destination IPv4 address, Type of Service, Source/ Destination port number, TCP flags, ICMP Type, if chosen protocol contains ICMP), for this ACE to identify the packet.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
ACL Profile Name Use the	drop down list to selected one of the user defined ACL profiles.
Sequence	Assign a sequence number to this ACE. The sequence is used to identify which one of ACEs in an ACL is firstly used to match ingress packets. The switch port bound with an ACL use the contained ACE rules, start with the one with lower sequence number to match the packet first.
Action Select the action applied to the packet matched this ACE. Permit or deny the packets into switch core, or shutdown the port for stopping further transmission.● Permit● Deny● Shutdown
Protocol Specify the protocol for filtering.Any - All packets will be filtered.Select - Choose one of the protocol (e.g., ICMP, IP in IP, TCP, EGP, IGP...) from the drop down list. Packets passing through the selected protocol will be filtered.Define - Specify a type number (0 - 255) for ICMP code. For example, 0 means “Echo Reply”; 254 means “RFC3692-style Experiment 2”.
Source IP / Destination IP	Specify the source and the destination IPv4 address for filtering.Any - All packets will be filtered.Or, enter the IP address to filter the packets coming from that address.
Service	Any - All packets will be filtered.DSCP - All IP traffic is mapped to queues based on the DSCP field in the IP header. If traffic is not IP traffic, it is mapped to the lowest priority queue.IP Precedence - All IP traffic is mapped to queues based onthe IP Precedence field in the IP header. If traffic is not IP traffic, it is mapped to the lowest priority queue.
Source Port / Destination Port	Specify the source and destination port number for filtering the packets.Any - All packets will be filtered.Single - Only the packets passing through the number defined here will be filtered.Range - Only the packets passing through the port range defined here will be filtered.
Add Click it to create a new binding profile.
Modify	- click it to modify the settings for the selected entry.- click it to remove the selected entry.

VI-2-3 IPv6

This page allows the network administrator to create ACE based on IPv6 address.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
ACL Profile Name Use the	drop down list to selected one of the user defined ACL profiles.
Sequence	Assign a sequence number to this ACE. The sequence is used to identify which one of ACEs in an ACL is firstly used to match ingress packets. The switch port bound with an ACL use the contained ACE rules, start with the one with lower sequence number to match the packet first.
Action Select the action applied to the packet matched this ACE. Permit or deny the packets into switch core, or shutdown the port for stopping further transmission.● Permit● Deny● Shutdown
Protocol Specify the protocol for filtering.Any - All packets will be filtered.Select - Choose one of the protocol (e.g., ICMP, TCP, EGP...) from the drop down list. Packets passing through the selected protocol will be filtered.Define - Specify a type number (0 - 255) for ICMP code. For example, 0 means “Echo Reply”; 254 means “RFC3692-style Experiment 2”.
Source IP / Destination IP	Specify the source and the destination IPv6 address for filtering.Any - All packets will be filtered.Or, enter the IPv6 address to filter the packets coming fromthat address.
Service	Any - All packets will be filtered.DSCP - All IP traffic is mapped to queues based on the DSCP field in the IP header. If traffic is not IP traffic, it is mapped to the lowest priority queue.IP Precedence - All IP traffic is mapped to queues based on the IP Precedence field in the IP header. If traffic is not IP traffic, it is mapped to the lowest priority queue.
Source Port / Destination Port	Specify the source and destination port number for filtering the packets.Any - All packets will be filtered.Single - Only the packets passing through the number defined here will be filtered.Range - Only the packets passing through the port range defined here will be filtered.
Add Click it to create a new binding profile.
Modify	[24H3] - Click it to modify the settings for the selected profile. - Click it to remove the selected entry.

VI-3 ACL Binding

This section allows you to bind Access Control Lists created in previous section to an interface (physical port or aggregation).

A physical port can only be bound with one of the IPv4 and IPv6 ACL, not both.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports Use the drop down list	to select the port profiles (GE1 to GE10)for binding ACL.
MAC ACL /IPv4 ACL /IPv6 ACL	Select ACLs (MAC, IPv4, and/ or IPv6) to be bound on this interface (port), so Switch may filter packets by using it.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

This page is left blank.

Part VII QoS Configuration

VII-1 General

QoS (Quality of Service) functions to provide different quality of service for various network applications and requirements and optimize the bandwidth resource distribution so as to provide a network service experience of a better quality.

VII-1-1 Properties

VII-1-1-1 QoS General Setting

This page allows the network administrator to specify Ingress Trust Mode for basic QoS mode.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
QoS Mode Disable -Disable	the function of QoS mode.Basic - Enable the function of QoS mode.
Ingress Trust Mode Select	the QoS operation mode.CoS/802.1p -Traffic is mapped to queues based on the CoS field in the VLAN tag, or based on the per-port default CoS value if there is no VLAN tag on the incoming packet.DSCP - All IP traffic is mapped to queues based on the DSCP field in the IP header. If traffic is not IP traffic, it is mapped to the lowest priority queue.CoS/802.1p-DSCP - All IP traffic is mapped to queues based on the DSCP field in the IP header. If traffic is not IP but has VLAN tag, mapped to queues based on the CoS value in the VLAN tag.IP Precedence - All IP traffic is mapped to queues based on the DSCP field in the IP header. If traffic is not IP but has VLAN tag, mapped to queues based on the CoS value in the VLAN tag.

Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

VII-1-1-2 Trust Ports

This page allows the network administrator to enable the trust mode of basic QoS on each port. Port that is trust disabled will be sent with lowest priority queue. The configuration result for each port will be displayed on the table listed on the lower side of this web page.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports	Use the drop down list to select the port profile (GE1 to GE10) or profiles.
Trust	Click Enable to make traffic follow the trust mode in general setting.Enable - Traffic will follow trust mode in general setting.Disable - No QoS service for this port.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

VII-1-2 Port Settings

This page allows the network administrator to configure port settings for QoS. The configuration result for each port will be displayed on the table listed on the lower side of this web page.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports	Use the drop down list to select the port profile (GE1 to GE10) or profiles.
Ingress Default CoS	Specify the default CoS priority value for those ingress frames without given trust QoS tag (802.1q/ DSCP/ IP Precedence, depending on configuration).
Engress Remarking
Remark CoS Disable - Disable CoS remarking function for outgoing packets.Enable - Egress traffic will be marked with CoS value according to the Queue to CoS mapping table.
Remark DSCP/IP Precedence	Disable - Disable DSCP/ IP Precedence remarking function for outgoing packets.DSCP - Egress traffic will be marked with DSCP value according to the Queue to DSCP mapping table.IP Precedence - Egress traffic will be marked with IP Precedence value according to the Queue to IP Precedence mapping table.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Modify	Click it to modify the settings for the selected port profile.

VII-1-3 Queue Settings

VigorSwitch supports multiple queues for each interface. The higher numbered queue represents the higher priority. The following lists the types of supported priority queue:

• Strict Priority (SP) - Egress traffic from the higher priority queue will be transmitted first, lower priority queue shall wait until all traffic in SP queue is transmitted.
  ● Weighted Round Robin (WRR) - The number of packets sent from the queue is proportional to the weight of the queue.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Queue There are eight queue ID numbers allowed to be configured.
Schedule	Strict Priority - Click it to set queue to strict priority typeWRR - Click it to set queue to Weight round robin type.
Weight If the queue type is WRR, set the queue weight for the queue.
% of WRR Bandwidth Display the percentage of traffic which can be sent by current queue compared to total WRR queues.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Strict Priority Queue Number	Display the number of queues using Strict Priority method.

VII-1-4 CoS Mapping

This section allows user to configure how ingress frames with CoS/802.1p tag map to QoS queues, and QoS queues to CoS/802.1p on egress frames.

Actual effectiveness is based on how QoS is configured in previous QoS section. This page provides settings for user to configure mapping only.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
CoS to Queue Mapping (for Ingress) - Settings for incoming packets.
Class of Service Display the class of service value (0 to 7).
Queue	Define the queue ID (level 1 to 8) for different class of service values.
Queue to CoS Mapping (for Egress Remarking) - Settings for outgoing packets.
Queue	Display the queue ID (level 1 to 8) for different class of service values.
Class of Service Define the class of service value (0 to 7).
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

This section allows user to configure how ingress packets with DSCP tag map to QoS queues, and QoS queues to DSCP on egress packets.

Actual effectiveness is based on how QoS is configured in previous QoS section. This page provides settings for user to configure mapping only.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
DSCP to Queue Mapping (for Ingress) - Settings for the incoming packets.
DSCP Display the DSCP value (0 to 7).
Queue Define the queue ID (level 1 to 8) for different DSCP values.
Queue to DSCP Mapping (for Egress Remarking) - Settings for outgoing packets.
Queue Display the queue ID (level 1 to 8) for different DSCP values.
DSCP Define the DSCP value (0 to 7).
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

This section allows user to configure how ingress packets with IP Precedence tag map to QoS queues, and QoS queues to IP Precedence on egress packets.

Actual effectiveness is based on how QoS is configured in previous QoS section. This page provides settings for user to configure mapping only.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
IP Precedence to Queue Mapping (for Ingress) - Settings for the incoming packets.
IP Precedence Display the	IP Precedence value (0 to 7).
Queue Define the queue ID	(level 1 to 8) for different IP Precedence values.
Queue to IP Precedence Mapping (for Egress Remarking) - Settings for outgoing packets.
Queue Display the queue ID	(level 1 to 8) for different IP Precedence values.
IP Precedence Define the	IP Precedence value (0 to 7).
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

VII-2 Bandwidth

Use the bandwidth setting pages to define values that determine how much traffic the switch can receive and send on specific port or queue.

VII-2-1 Ingress Rate Limit

This page allows a user to configure ingress port rate limit. The ingress rate limit is the number of bits per second that can be received from the ingress interface. Excess bandwidth above this limit is discarded. The configuration result for each port will be displayed on the table listed on the lower side of this web page.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ingress Rate Limit
Ports	Use the drop down list to select the port profile (GE1 to GE10) or profiles.
State	Disable - Disable ingress bandwidth control.Enable - Enable ingress bandwidth control.
Rate (Kbps) Enter the rate	value,<16-1000000>,unit:16 Kbps.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Modify	Click it to modify the settings for the selected port profile.

VII-2-2 Egress Shaping Rate

This page allows a user to configure egress port rate limit. The egress rate limit is the number of bits per second that can be received from the egress interface. Excess bandwidth above this limit is discarded.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Egress Shapping Rate
Ports	Use the drop down list to select the port profile (GE1 to GE10) or profiles.
State	Disable - Disable egress bandwidth control.Enable - Enable egress bandwidth control.
CIR (Kbps) Enter the rate value, <16-1000000>, unit: 16 Kbps.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Modify	Click it to modify the settings for the selected port profile.

VII-2-3 Egress Shaping Per Queue

This page allows user to configure the maximum egress bandwidth not only by port but also by specific QoS queues. The configuration result for each port will be displayed on the table listed on the lower side of this web page.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Egress Shapping Per Queue
Port	Use the drop down list to select the port profile (GE1 to GE10) or profiles.
Queue Use the drop down	list to select queue number (1 to 8) for the selected GE port.
State	Disable - Disable egress bandwidth control.Enable - Enable egress bandwidth control.
CIR (Kbps) Enter the rate value,<16-1000000>,unit:16 Kbps.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

This page is left blank.

Part VIII PoE Configuration

VIII-1 Properties

PoE is available for VigorSwitch P2100 only.

This page allows a user to configure general settings for PoE and configure priority of each port for supplying PoE power. While maximum power budget is reached, power will be served starting with critical priority.

If the priority setting for all GE ports is configured as the same value (e.g., High); then, GE1 will have the highest priority to obtain PoE power in actual operation.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
PoE Mode Disable - Disable	the PoE function.Auto - Provides plug and play PoE function. PoE schedule and Power Limit are disabled in this mode.Manual - Before using PoE>>Schedule, set Manual as PoE mode.
Ports Use the drop down list to select the port (GE1 to GE8) or ports for applying PoE configuration.
Enable	Enable - Make the selected ports be applied with PoE nDisable - Make the selected ports be not applied with PoE mode.
Priority Select Priority for	PoE device.Low -Set PoE device to low priority connection.High -Set PoE device to high priority connection.Critical - Set PoE device to highest priority connection.
Power Limit	This setting is available whenManualis selected as PoE Mode.Enter the value as the maximum limit of power given to each physical port.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

VIII-2 Status

This page displays the current PoE status (configured in Properties, Device Check and Schedule) for each PoE port.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Refresh Click it to refresh	the status page.
PoE Mode	Display the PoE Mode (Manual, Auto or Disable) selected for the LAN port.
Power Budget(W) Display	the maximum power this switch can supply over PoE.
Consuming Power(W) Display	play current power being consumed by all devices over PoE.
Remaining Power(W) Display	play remaining power that can be supplied to additional devices over PoE.
Power Cycle	Apply – If PoE device connects to VigorSwitch, such button will be available for you to manually perform the cold boot for the PoE device by cycling the power supply.

VIII-3 Schedule

VIII-3-1 Schedule Profile

This page allows the network administrator to configure maximum 15 PoE schedule rules. It is available only when Manual is selected as PoE Mode in PoE>>Properties.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Schedule Index	Use the drop down list (1 to 15) to choose one schedule profile.
Enable Disable - The selected schedule profile will not take action but be saved for future use.Enable - The selected schedule profile will take action as configured.
Description Enter a brief comment for such schedule.
Start Date	Specify the starting date of the schedule by choosing from a drop down calendar.
Start Time Specify the starting time of the schedule by using the drop down list to specify the starting time (hours and minutes).
Duration Time Define the time duration (hours and minutes).
Action Specify which action should perform during the period of the schedule.Power On - PoE connection is always on.Power Off - PoE connection is always down.
How Often Specify how often the schedule will be applied.Once - The schedule will be applied just once.Weekdays - Specify which days in one week should perform
	the schedule.Monthly, on date - Specify the day in a month as the starting point.Cycle duration (days) - The period of cycle duration is between 1 day and 31 days. For example, 7 means the whole cycle is 7 days; 20 means the whole cycle is 20 days. When the time is up, the PoE device will be turned on of off automatically.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

VII-3-2 Port Scheduling

This page allows the network administrator to specify the PoE port for applying the schedule. The configuration result for each port will be displayed on the table listed on the lower side of this web page.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports Select the port or ports for applying the schedule.
Schedule Index Use the drop down list to choose the schedule profile (from 1 to 15). After clickingApply, the selected port(s) will be applied with the specified schedule.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

This page is left blank.

Part IX Certificate Maintenance

IX-1 Certificate Management

The digital certificate is an electronic document issued by a certification authority (CA) to an entity to prove ownership of a public key. It contains identifying information including the issued-to party's name, a serial number, expiration dates etc., and the digital signature of the certificate-issuing authority so that a recipient can verify that the certificate is real.

VigorSwitch is capable of generating a new certificate as a CA server does. This page allows you to fill required information for generating a new certificate.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Country(C)	Enter the country code (e.g., TW) in which your organization is located.
State or Province Name(ST)	Enter the state or province where your organization is located.
Location (L)	Enter the city where you're your organization is located.
Organization (O) Enter the legal name of your organization.
Organization Unit (OU) Enter the department within your organization that you wish to be associated with this certificate.
Common Name (CN) Enter the fully-qualified domain name / WAN IP that will be used to reach your server.
Email (E) Enter the email address of the entry.
Renew Click to generate a new certificate.

Part X System Maintenance

X-1 TR-069

This device supports TR-069 standard. It is very convenient for an administrator to manage a TR-069 device (e.g., such switch) through an Auto Configuration Server, e.g., VigorACS.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
ACS Settings	TR-069 - Click Enable to activate the settings on this page.URL/Username/Password - Such data must be typed according to the ACS (Auto Configuration Server) you want to link. Please refer to Auto Configuration Server user's manual for detailed information.Wizard - Click it to enter the IP address of VigorACS server, port number and the handler.Last Inform - Display the time that VigorACS server made a response while receiving Inform message from switch last time.Test Inform -Click Test With Inform to send a message based on the event code selection to test if such switch is able to communicate with VigorACS SI server.
CPE Settings The field lists	the authentication information coming from VigorACS server.CPE Client - Specify a protocol (HTTP/ HTTPS)for authentication.Port - Sometimes, port conflict might be occurred. To solve such problem, you might change port number for switch. The default number is 8069.Usage / Password - Type the username and password that VigorACS can use to access into such switch.
TLS Version Settings TLS	Minimum Protocol Version - Due to security consideration, the built-in HTTPS VPN server of the router had upgraded to TLS1.x protocol. Select one of the versions.
Periodic Inform Settings	Periodic Inform Settings - The default setting is Disable. If enabled, please set interval time or schedule time for theVigor switch to send notification to CPE. Or click Disable to close the mechanism of notification.Interval Time - Enter a value.
STUN Settings	STUN Settings -The default is Disable. If you click Enable, please type the relational settings listed below.Server Address - Enter the IP address of the STUN server.Server Port - Enter the port number of the STUN server.Minimum Keep Alive Period - If STUN is enabled, Vigor switch must send binding request to the server for the purpose of maintaining the binding in the Gateway. Please type a number as the minimum period. The default setting is “60 seconds”.Maximum Keep Alive Period - If STUN is enabled, Vigor switch must send binding request to the server for the purpose of maintaining the binding in the Gateway. Please type a number as the maximum period. A value of “-1” indicates that no maximum period is specified. The default setting is “0 second”.
Health Check Vigor system	will check the health status of LAN ports including link up / down, speed change or PoE power disconnection.Port Link Up/Down - Select LAN port(s) to do the health check of port link.Link Speed Change - Select LAN port(s) to do the health check of speed change.PoE Port Warning - Select LAN port(s) to do the health check of PoE power.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Clear Remove current configuration.

X-2 OpenVPN

Devices connecting to VigorSwitch can transmit data to remote end via OpenVPN to ensure the information security.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Remote Management Enable	- Click it to enable OpenVPN tunnel between VigorSwitch with the remote end.Disable - Click it to disable OpenVPN tunnel.
Config File As a VPN client	, please import the OpenVPN config file coming from OpenVPN server.
Apply Save and apply the settings to the switch.
Clear Discards current settings.
Status	Displays current OpenVPN status (Disabled, Connecting or Success) and configuration file used.

X-3 Webhook

Without getting any request, VigorSwitch will send the data (if available) that a user concerned to the specified URL (provided by remote client) automatically.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Webhook	Enable - Click it to enable the webhook service. The data will be transmitted to the specified URL.Disable -Click it to disable the webhook service.
URL Specify the destination	to receive the real-time data by entering the URL.Please get the URL from the client who wants to obtain the newest and available data automatically from the switch.
Report Period Set the transmission interval (unit is minute).Keep my settings while rest default - Check the box to keep the webhook configuration when resetting VigorSwitch with default settings.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Test Report Vigor system will send a test report to the remote address.

X-4 LLDP

LLDP is a one-way protocol; there are no request/response sequences. Information is advertised by stations implementing the transmit function, and is received and processed by stations implementing the receive function. The LLDP category contains LLDP and LLDP-MED pages.

X-4-1 Properties

This page allows a user to set general settings for LLDP.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
LLDP State Enable - Enable LLDP protocol on this switch. Disable - Disable LLDP protocol on this switch.
Transmission Interval Select the interval at which frames are transmitted. The default is 30 seconds, and the valid range is 5-32768seconds.
Holdtime Multiplier Select the multiplier on the transmit interval to assign to TTL (range 2-10, default = 4).
Reinitialization Delay	Select the delay before a re-initialization (range 1-10 seconds, default = 2).
Transmit Delay Select the delay after an LLDP frame is sent (range 1-8192 seconds, default = 3).
LLDP-MED Fast Start Repeat Count	Select the number of LLDP packets that will be sent during LLDP-MED Fast Start period.The default is 3. Available range is from 1 to 10.
LLDP MED Network Policy for Voice Application	Auto - After checking the box, Vigor switch will create an LLDP MED network policy for voice application (e.g, voice signaling, guest voice, softphone voice and etc.,) based on the voice VLAN, automatically.

X-4-2 LLDP Port Setting

This page allows a user to select specified port or all ports to configure LLDP state.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports	Use the drop down list to select the port (GE1 to GE10) or ports for device check.
State	Disable - Disable the transmission of LLDP PDUs.TX&RX - Transmit and receive LLDP PDUs both.TX Only - Transmit LLDP PDUs only.RX Only - Receive LLDP PDUs only.
Optional TLVs	Within data communication protocols, optional information may be encoded as a type-length-value or TLV element inside a protocol. TLV is also known as tag-length value.The type and length are fixed in size (typically 1-4 bytes), and the value field is of variable size.Select the LLDP optional TLVs to be carried (multiple selection is allowed).Available items include System Name, Port Description, System Description, System Capability, 802.3 MAC-PHY, 802.3 Link Aggregation, 802.3 Maximum Frame Size, Management Address and 802.1 PVID.
VLAN Select the VLAN ID number to be performed (multiple selections are allowed).
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Modify	- Click it to modify the settings for the selected port profile.

X-4-3 LLDP Local Device

This page displays information for LLDP Local Device.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Device Summary Display a summary of the LLDP information for this switch.Chassis ID Subtype - Display the type of chassis ID, such as the MAC address.Chassis ID - Display Identifier of chassis. Where the chassis ID subtype is a MAC address, the MAC address of the switch is displayed.System Name - Display model name of switch.System Description - Display description of switch.Capabilities Supported - Display the primary functions of the device, such as Bridge, WLAN AP, or Router.Capabilities Enabled - Primary enabled functions of the device.Port ID Subtype - Display the type of the port identifier that is shown.
Port Details Display detailed information of the selected GE port.	Detail - Click the button under it to review the detailed information contained in TLVs sent out from each interface, containing MAC/ PHY, 802.3, 802.3 Link Aggregation, 802.1 VLAN and Protocol for each LAN port (GE1 to GE10).

X-4-4 MED Network Policy

This page allows the network administrator to set MED (Media Endpoint Discovery) network policy.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Policy ID Choose a number	for configuring the policy profile.Available selections include 1 to 32.
Enable Policy Enable - Click it to enable such function.
Application	There are several applications which can be used for MED network.Selection includes Voice Signaling, Guest Voice, Guest Voice Signaling, Softphone Voice, Video Conferencing, Stream Video and Video Signaling.
VLAN	Set a VLAN ID (ranging from 1 to 4095) for such profile.
VLAN Tag Specify if the out	going packets will be tagged or not.Untag - Packets will be sent out without any tag.Tag - Packets will be sent out with a number tagged.
Priority Set Layer2 priority	(range from 0 to 7).
DSCP Set DSCP value (range form 0 to 63).
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Modify Return to factory default settings.

X-4-5 LLDP MED Port Settings

This page allows the network administrator to configure TLV (Type / Length / Value) settings for each port.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Ports Choose the port(s) for configuring TLV settings.
State	Enable - Click it to enable LLDP MED on the selected port.
Available Optional TLV Available TLV items will be shown in this field.Choose the one(s) you want and click the >> arrow to transfer the selection(s) to the field of “Selected Optional TLV”.
Selected Optional TLV Display the selected TLV items.
Selected Network Policies	Select network policy profiles (created in LLDP>>LLDP MED Network Policy) for applying onto the selected port.
Location TLV Settings Define the location, civic address and ECS ELIN for LLDP protocol.Coordinate -Enter the coordinate location in 16 pairs of hexadecimal characters.Civic - Enter the civic address in 6 ~ 160 pairs of hexadecimal characters.ECS ELIN - Enter the ECS (Emergency Call Service) ELIN (Emergency Location Identification Number) in 10 ~ 25 pairs of hexadecimal characters.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

X-4-6 LLDP Remote Device

This page allows the network administrator to view the information sent from neighboring devices by LLDP protocol.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Local Port	Display the number of the local port to which the neighbor is connected.
Chassis ID Subtype	Display the type of chassis ID (for example, MAC address).
Chassis ID Display the identifier of the 802 LAN neighboring device's chassis.
Port ID Subtype Display the type of port identifier.
Port ID Display the number of port identifier.
System Name Display the name of the switch.
Time to Live Display the time interval in seconds after which the information for remote device will be deleted.
Details Display detailed information contained in TLVs sent out from neighboring devices.
Delete Click it to remove information of the selected port.

X-4-7 LLDP Overloading

This page allows user to review current size, overall size of LLDP packet and whether it is to exceed maximum allowed size of single LLDP packet.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Port Display the name of the port.
Total(Bytes)	Display the total number of bytes of LLDP information in each packet.
Left to Send(Bytes)	Display the total number of available bytes left for additional LLDP information in each packet.
Status Display if LLDP TLVs has overloaded the PDU maximum size or not.
Mandatory TLVs Display how many bytes used by mandatory TLVs.
802.3 TLVs Display how many bytes used by 802.3 TLVs.
Optional TLVs Displays how many bytes used by optional TLVs.
802.1 TLVs Displays how many bytes used by 802.1 TLVs.

X-5 SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an "Internet-standard protocol for managing devices on IP networks". Devices that typically support SNMP include routers, switches, servers, workstations, printers, modem racks and more.

SNMP is used mostly in network management systems to monitor network-attached devices for conditions that warrant administrative attention.

SNMP is a component of the Internet Protocol Suite as defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). It consists of a set of standards for network management, including an application layer protocol, a database schema, and a set of data objects.

An SNMP-managed network consists of three key components:

• Managed device
  ● Agent - software which runs on managed devices
  ● Network management station (NMS) - software which runs on the manager

A managed device is a network node that implements an SNMP interface that allows unidirectional (read-only) or bidirectional (read and write) access to node-specific information. Managed devices exchange node-specific information with the NMSs. Sometimes called network elements, the managed devices can be any type of device, including, but not limited to, routers, access servers, switches, bridges, hubs, IP telephones, IP video cameras, computer hosts, and printers.

An agent is a network-management software module that resides on a managed device. An agent has local knowledge of management information and translates that information to or from an SNMP-specific form.

A network management station (NMS) executes applications that monitor and control managed devices. NMSs provide the bulk of the processing and memory resources required for network management. One or more NMSs may exist on any managed network.

X-5-1 View

This page allows the network administrator to create MIB views (Management information base) and then include or exclude OID (Object Identifier) in a view.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
View Name Enter a name of the MIB view.
OID Subtree Enter an OID string to be included or excluded from the MIB view.
Type Determine to include or exclude the selected MIBs.
Add Add the settings to the switch and display the content in this page.
Delete Remove the selected entry.

X-5-2 Group

This page allows the network administrator to group SNMP users and assign different authorization and access privileges.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Group Name Enter a name	for the group.
Version Specify SNMP version.
Security Level Specify SNMP	MP security level for the group. It is available when SNMPv3 is selected.No Security - No authentication and no encryption.Authentication - Requires authentication but no encryption.Authentication and Privacy -Requires authentication and encryption.
Read View Enabled - Users	of this group have the right to read the selected MIB view.Use the drop down list to select one of the views. The default is “all”, which means the group user can read all MIB views.
Write View Enabled - Users	of this group have the right to write the selected MIB view.Use the drop down list to select one of the views. The default is “all”, which means the group user can write all MIB views.
Notify View Enabled - Users	of this group have the right to send notification for the selected MIB view.Use the drop down list to select one of the views. The default is “all”, which means the group user have the right to send notification for all MIB views.
Add Click it to create a new group profile.
Edit	- Click it to modify the settings for the selected group.

- click it to remove the selected group.

X-5-3 Community

This page allows a user to add/remove multiple communities of SNMP.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Community Name Enter a	name as community name. The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters.
Type	Basic – View and access right can be specified for such SNMP community profile.Advanced – Specify one of the SNMP groups for such SNMP community profile.
View Simply specify one of	the view profiles (created inSNMP>>View) from the drop down list.
Access Right	Read Only - It allows unidirectional access to node-specific information.Read & Write - It allows bidirectional access to node-specific information.
Group	Specify the SNMP group configured by user (SNMP>>Group) to define the object available to the community.
Add Click to add a new community.
Delete Click to remove the selectd community string.

X-5-4 User

This page allows a user to configure SNMPv3 user profile.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
User Name Enter a name for creating new SNMP user.
Group	Choose one of the SNMPv3 groups from the drop down list.Then, this user profile will be grouped under the selected SNMP group.
Security Level Display the security level configured for the selected SNMP group. It is changable only when the SNMPv3 group is adjustable in SNMP>>Group.
Authentication Method It is changable only when the SNMPv3 group is adjustable in SNMP>>Group.Method - You can change the methods (None, MD5, SHA) for the selected SNMPv3 group. If no method is available for you to select, that means the selected SNMPv3 group is set with No Security.Password - Enter a string as the password for authentication.
Privacy	Method - You can change the methods (None, DES) for the selected SNMPv3 group. If no method is available for you to select, that means the selected SNMPv3 group is set with No Security.Password - Enter a string as the password for authentication.
Add Click it to add a new user profile.
Edit	- click it to modify the settings for the selected profile.- click it to remove the selected entry.

However, if there is no SNMPv3 group ready for use, the following pages will appear instead. Refer to IX-5-2 Group to create a SNMPv3 group first.

X-5-5 Engine ID

X-5-5-1 LocalEngine ID

This page allows a user to configure and display SNMP local engine ID.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Engine ID	The user defined engine ID is range 10 to 64 hexadecimal characters, and the hexadecimal number must be divided by “2”.User Defined - If it is checked, the local engine ID will be configured manually. If not, the default Engine ID which is made up of MAC and Enterprise ID will be used instead.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

X-5-5-2 Remote Engine ID

This page allows a user to configure and display SNMP remote engine ID.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Address Type	Specify the address type for entering hostname or IPv4/IPv6 address.
Server Address Enter the	IP address or the host name of the SNMP server.
Engine ID Specify the engine	the ID for remote SNMP server.The engine ID is range10 to 64 hexadecimal characters, and the hexadecimal number must be divided by 2.
Add Click it to create a new profile.
Edit	[7CSK]- click it to modify the settings for the selected server profile.- click it to remove the selected entry.

X-5-6 Trap Event

This page allows a user to add or delete SNMP trap receiver IP address and community name.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Authentication Failure Enable	- VigorSwtich will reboot when encountering authentication failure (including community not match or user password not match).
Link Up / Down Enable - VigorSwtich will reboot while encountering port link up or down trap.
Cold Start Enable - VigorSwtich will reboot while encountering user trap.
Warm Start Enable - VigorSwtich will reboot while encountering power down trap.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

X-5-7 Notification

This page allows a user to configure a host to receive SNMPv1/ v2/ v3 notification.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Address Type Choose IPv4	IPv6/ Hostname to specify IP address or the hostname of the SNMP trap recipients.
Server Address Enter the	IP address of SNMP server based on the address type selected above.
Version Specify SNMP notification version (SNMPv1/ v2/ v3).
Type Specify Notification	TypeTrap -Send SNMP traps to the host.Inform - Send SNMP informs to the host. If it is used, Timeout and Retry also shall be defined.
Community/user Use the drop down list to choose one of the community profiles.
Security Level	Specify SNMP security level for SNMP notification packet. It is available when SNMPv3 is selected.No Security - No authentication.Authentication - Authentication without encryption will be performed for packets.Authentication and Privacy - Authentication with encryption will be performed for packets.
Server Port Specify the UDP port number for the recipient's server.Use Default - If it is checked, the default number (162) will be used automatically.
Timeout	Specify the SNMP informs timeout. It is available whenInformis selected as Type.Use Default - If it is checked, the default number (15) will beused automatically.
Retry Specify the SNMP informs retry count. It is available whenInformis selected as Type.Use Default- If it is checked, the default number (3) will be used automatically.
Add Click it to create a new notification profile.
Edit	cted server

X-6 Access Manager

This page allows the network administrator to control availability of management services such as HTTP, HTTPS, Telent and SSH.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
HTTP Service HTTP is the	acronym of HyperText Transfer Protocol. Enabled -Click it to enable HTTP service. ● HTTP Management Port - Enter a port number.
HTTPS Service HTTPS is the	acronym of Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer. Enabled - Click it to enable HTTPS service. ● HTTPS Management Port - Enter a port number.
Enforce HTTPS Management	Enabled - Users will be forced to access into the web user interface of VigorSwitch by HTTPS protocol.
TLS Minimum Protocol Version	TLS1.2 / TLS 1.3 - VigorSwitch supports TLS1.2 and TLS 1.3 protocols for web browsing. Select one of the versions as a protocol for having higher connection security.
Telnet Service Telnet is the	TCP/IP standard protocol for remote terminal service. TELNET allows a user at one site to interact with a remote timesharing system at another site as if the user's keyboard and display connected directly to the remote machine. Disable - Click it for not accessing telnet service. Enable - Click it to access telnet service. ● Telnet Management Port - Enter a port number.
SSH Service Enable - Enable	SSH service. ● SSH Management Port - Enter a port number.
Apply Apply the settings to	the switch.

X-7 CLI Session Manager

This page will show the information related to CLI session coming from LAN user. Up to three session connections can be shown at one time.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
PID Displays an identificat	on number assigned by Vigor switch.
Type Displays the session	type used by the client.
User Displays the username	used by the client accessing intoVigorSwitch.
Host Displays the IP address	ss of the host.
Edit Click to delete the session and terminate the CLI connection.

X-8 Time and Date

X-8-1 System Time Zone

This page allows a user to specify where the time of VigorSwitch should be inquired from.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
System Time Zone Setting
Auto Detect Time Zone Enable	- The system will detect the time zone automatically. Disable - Select a time zone manually. • Time Zone - Use the drop down menu to select a time zone that VigorSwitch is located.
Daylight Saving Time Select	the mode of daylight saving time. Disable -Disable daylight saving time. Recurring - Using recurring mode of daylight saving time. Non-Recurring - Using non-recurring mode of daylight saving time. USA -Using daylight saving time in the United States that starts on the second Sunday of March and ends on the first Sunday of November. European - Using daylight saving time in the Europe that starts on the last Sunday.
Daylight Saving Time Offset	It is available when Recurring is selected as Daylight Saving Time. Specify the adjust offset of daylight saving time.
Recurring From / To	It is available when Recurring is selected as Daylight Saving Time. From - Specify the starting time of recurring daylight savingtime.To - Specify the ending time of recurring daylight saving time.
Non-recurring From / To	It is available when Non-Recurring is selected as Daylight Saving Time.From - Specify the starting time of non-recurring daylight saving time.To - Specify the ending time of recurring daylight saving time.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
System Time Zone Informations	Display the status of system time zone.

X-8-2 Time

This page allows a user to specify time and activate SNTP server manually.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Manual Time	Specify static time (year, month, day, hours, minutes and seconds) manually.
Enable SNTP Enable - Click it to enable SNTP time server.Disable - Click to disable the time server.
SNTP/NTP Server Address	Enter the web site of the time server or the IP address of the server.
Server Port Enter the port	number use by the time server.
Automatically Update Interval	Select the time interval at which the switch updates the system time.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

X-9 Backup Manager

Backup Manager allows a user to backup the firmware image or configuration file on the switch to remote TFTP server or host file system through HTTP protocol.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Backup Method Select Backup method.	TFTP - Using TFTP to backup firmware.
	HTTP - Using WEB browser to ubackup firmware.
Server IP It is available when TFTP is selected as Backup Method.Enter the IPv4/ IPv6 address for the TFTP server.
Backup Type Configuration - Make a backup copy for the configurations for VigorSwitch.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

X-10 Upgrade Manager

Backup Manager allows a user to upgrade the firmware image or configuration file on the switch to remote TFTP server or host file system through HTTP protocol.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Upgrade Method Select Upgrade method:TFTP - Using TFTP to upgrade firmware.HTTP - Using WEB browser to upgrade firmware.
Server IP	It is available when TFTP is selected as Upgrade Method.Enter the IPv4/ IPv6 address for the TFTP server.
File Name	It is available when TFTP is selected as Upgrade Method.Enter the firmware image or configuration file name on the TFTP server.
File/Path	It is available when HTTP is selected as Upgrade Method.Choose the firmware file located in your computer.
Upgrade Type	It is available when TFTP is selected as Upgrade Method.Image - Click it to upgrade the firmware image.Configuration - Click ito to upgrade the configurations for VigorSwitch.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

X-11 Account Manager

This page allows a user to add or delete local user on switch database for authentication. The configuration result for each port will be displayed on the table listed on the lower side of this web page.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Username Enter a username	for new account.If you want to modify an existed user account, simply enter the same string in this field. Then, modify the password and choose privilege level. After clickingApply, the existed user name will be modified with different values.
Password Enter a password	for new account.
Password Strength Display	the strength (weak, medium, or strong) of the password entered above.
Retype Password	Retype password to make sure the password is exactly you typed before in “Password” field.
Privilege Level Use the drop down list to select privilege level (Admin/ User) for new account.Admin - Allow to change switch settings.User - See switch settings only. Not allow to change it.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Modify	- Click it to modify the settings for the selected user profile.- Click it to remove the selected entry.

X-12 Factory Default

Click Apply to return to factory default settings for VigorSwitch.

If Keep my current IPv4 address settings is checked, after clicking Apply, the original configuration for IP address will be kept.

X-13 Reboot Switch

Click Apply to reboot VigorSwitch with current settings.

Part XI Diagnostics

XI-1 Device Check

After finished copper test, the results will be shown on the lower side of this web page.

This page is used to configure device check of PoE PD devices. It can be applied to PoE PD devices connected directly, check ping echo status, and forcibly reboot the device when meeting the preset health condition.

The configuration result for each port will be displayed on the table listed on the lower side of this web page.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Port	Use the drop down list to select the port (GE1 to GE10) or ports for device check.
Enable Disable - No PoE	function for the selected GE port.Enable - PoE function will be enabled for the selected GE port.
Ping IP Address Enter the	IP address of the PoE device for check.
Interval Time (sec.) The ping	ing check will be performed every 10, 30, 60 or 120 seconds for the selected port (PoE device).
Retry Time	The system will perform the ping check the selected port (PoE device) for 1, 3 or 5 times.
Failure Action Specify the	action performed for PoE device when there is no number of retry time of echo from given IP address.Power Cycle - Forcely reboot the device by cycling the power given to PoE device.Power Off - The PoE divice will be powered off.Nothing - Log this event only, no action is taken on PoE device.
Mail Alert Enable - Click it	to enable the mail alert function.Disable - Click it to disable the mail alert funciton.

XI-2 Cable Diagnostics

After finished copper test, the results will be shown on the lower side of this web page.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Port	Use the drop down list to select the port (GE1 to GE10) or ports for performing cable diagnostics.
Start Perform the copper test action.
Show Details / Hide Details	Click to display or hide more detailed information.

XI-3 SFP Vendor Info

To get general information about the SFP vendor, select Diagnostics>>SFP Vendor Info.

XI-4 Ping Test

After finished the ping test, the results will be shown on the lower side of this web page.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Protocol Choose IPv4/ IPv6	to specify IP address for sending ping to check if network path is ok.
Host Enter the IP address of SNMP server based on the protocol selected above.
Count	It means how many times to send ping request packet.Enter a number between 1 and 5 as the count and the default configuration is 4.
Interval(sec) Define the interval to perform ping action. For example, “1” means the ping action will be performed per second.
Start Perform ping action.
Stop Terminate ping action.

XI-5 DHCP Table

This page shows the IP list assigned by the DHCP server.

XI-6-1 SysLog Explorer

After clicking View, the results will be shown on the lower side of this web page.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Source	Volatile Memory - Explore the logs contained in volatile memory (also known as RAM).Non-Volatile Memory - Explore the logs contained in non-volatile memory (also known as Flash).
Severity Select severity (e	merg, alert, crit, error, warning, notice, info and debug) of log messages which you wish to filter out for review.
Category	Select the categories (related features) of logs you wish to review.Category contains AAA, ACL, AUTHMGR, CABLE_DIAG, DAI, DHCP_SNOOPING, GVRP, IGMP_SNOOPING, IPSG, L2, LLDP, Mac-based VLAN, Mirror, MLD_SNOOPING, Platform, PM, Port, PORT_SECURITY, QoS, Rate, SNMP, STP, Security suite, System, Surveillance VLAN, Trunk, UDLD and VLAN.
View Click it to display logs based on the settings configured above.
Refresh Click it to refresh the log.
Clear All Clear it to remove all logs displayed in this page.

XI-6-2 SysLog Settings

XI-6-2-1 SysLog Service

This page allows user to enable system logging into local syslog and specific remote syslog server for storage.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
SysLog Service	Enable – Click it to activate function of syslog.Disable – Click it to inactivate the function.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.

XI-6-2-2 Local SysLog

This page allows user to enable logging into volatile memory or non-volatile memory.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Source	Volatile Memory - Select the volatile memory for saving local log. Volatile memory does not hold the log after reboot or power off.Non-Volatile Memory - Select the non-volatile memory for saving.If you want to modify Volatile Memory / Non-Volatile Memory, select Volatile Memory / Non-Volatile Memory in this field. Then, use the drop down list of severity to specify type of log message. After clicking Apply, the Volatile Memory / Non-Volatile Memory will be modified with new configured severity level.
Severity Select severity (emerg, alert, crit, error, warning, notice, info and debug) of log messages which will be stored.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Delete Remove all logs displayed in this page.

XI-6-2-3 Remote SysLog

This page allows user to enable system logging into specific remote syslog server for storage.

After clicking Apply, the results will be shown on the lower side of this web page.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
Server Address Enter the	P address of Syslog server.
Server Port	Specify the port that syslog should be sent to.
Severity Select severity (emerg, alert, crit, error, warning, notice, info and debug) of log messages which will be stored.
Facility One device supports multiple facilities (represented with facility ID, local0 to local7) of remote Syslog server. For each facility ID contains different syslog server configuration, please choose a facility ID for such Syslog server.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Delete Remove specific remote syslog entry.

XI-6-2-4 SysLog Mail

This page allows user to enable system logging into specific remote syslog server for storage. After clicking Apply, the results will be shown on the lower side of this web page.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
State	Enable - Enable the function of Syslog Mail.Disable - Disable the function of Syslog Mail.
Category Vigor sytem will	send the e-mail related to the selected feature(s) to the recipient.
SMTP Server Enter IP address or URL of the SMTP server.
SMTP Port Enter the port number for the SMTP server.
Authentication	Enable - Click it to enable authentication mechanism.Usage - Enter a user name for authentication.Password - Enter a password for authentication.
Encryption After enabling	Authentication, choose one of the encryption servers for data encryption.StartTLS - The mail will be encrypted with StartTLS.SSL/TLS - The mail will be encrypted with SSL/ TLS.Disable - The mail sent out will not be encrypted.
Sender Enter the email address which will send the syslog mail out.
Email Address Enter the email address which will receive the syslog mail.
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Send test mail	After clicking this button, VigorSwitch system will send a test mail to the recipient.

XI-7 Route Table

This page shows a list of route information via IPv4 address.

Part XII Mail Alert

XII-1 Alert Setting

This page allows a user to configure settings for VigorSwitch to send alert mail when encountering certain situation.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item	Description
State	● Enable - Click it to enable the mail alert function.● Disable - Click it to disable the mail alert funciton.
SMTP Server Enter IP address or URL of the SMTP server.
SMTP Port Enter the port number for the SMTP server.
Authentication	Enable - Click it to enable authentication mechanism.● User Name - Enter a user name for authentication.● Password - Enter a password for authentication.
Encryption After enabling	Authentication, choose one of the encryption servers for data encryption.● StartTLS - The mail will be encrypted with StartTLS.● SSL/TLS - The mail will be encrypted with SSL/TLS.● Disable - The mail sent out will not be encrypted.
Sender Enter the email address which will send the alert mail out.
Receiver Enter the email address which will receive the alert mail.
Min. Transmit Interval	Set a time interval for VigorSwitch system to send an alert out from the specified sender.
Alert Type Specify the condition(s) for VigorSwitch system to send an alert out.● Port Link Status● Port Link Speed● System Restarted
	PoE Warning StatusIP ConflictDevice CheckONVIF Throughput Threshold
Apply Apply the settings to the switch.
Send test mail	After clicking this button, VigorSwitch system will send a test mail to the recipient.

This page is left blank.

Part XIII Telnet Commands

XIII-1 Accessing Telnet of VigorSwitch

This chapter also gives you a general description for accessing telnet and describes the firmware versions for the routers explained in this manual.

Info

For Windows 7 user, please make sure the Windows Features of Telnet Client has been turned on under Control Panel>>Programs.

Type cmd and press Enter. The Telnet terminal will be open later.

In the following window, type Telnet 192.168.1.224 as below and press Enter. Note that the IP address in the example is the default address of the router. If you have changed the default, enter the current IP address of the router.

Next, enter admin/ admin for Account/ Password.

For users using previous Windows system (e.g., XP), simply click Start >> Run and type Telnet 192.168.1.224 in the Open box.

Next, enter admin/ admin for Account/ Password.

XIII-2 Available Commands

Enter ? to get a list of available commands.

The available commands contain - clear, clock, configure, copy, delete, disable, end, exit, hardware-monitor, ping, reboot, renew, restore-defaults, save, show, ssl, terminal, traceroute and udld. Each command will be explained as follows.

Note: You can also enter ? to check if there are subcommands under current command.

XII-2-1 Clear Configuration

This command allows resetting the functions of ARP, authentication, gvrp, interfaces, IP, IPv6, LACP, Line, LLDP, Logging, MAC, mvr, and Spanning Tree.

Telnet Command: clear arp

Use this command to clear entries in the ARP cache.

Syntax Items

clear arp

Description

Syntax Items Description
clear arp- Enter the IP address of the device (e.g., 192.168.1.224).Related Syntax:# clear arp# clear arp

Example

P2100# clear arp 192.168.1.224

P2100#

Tel net Command: clear authentication

Use this command to clear authentication sessions based on LAN port, MAC address, or authentication type for 802.1x/MAC authentication.

Syntax Items

clear authentication sessions

clear authentication sessions interfaces gigabitethernet

clear authentication sessions mac

clear authentication sessions session-id

clear authentication sessions type

Description

Syntax Items Description
clear authentication sessions	Clear all of the sessions related to authentication.Related Syntax:# clear authentication sessions
clear authentication sessions interfaces gigabitethernet	Clear the sessions of a specific interface.<1-10>- Enter the number of LAN port.Related Syntax:# clear authentication sessions interfaces gigabitethernet<1-10>
clear authentication sessions mac	Clear the sessions with the MAC address set here.- Enter the MAC address of the device that you want to clear the authentication information.Related Syntax:# clear authentication sessions mac
clear authentication sessions session-id	Clear the sessions with the string set here.- Enter a string of a session that you want to clear.Related Syntax:# clear authentication sessions session-id
clear authentication sessions type	Clear the sessions with authentication type selected here.- Use 802.1x authentication.- Use mac-based authentication.- Use web-based authentication.Related Syntax:# clear authentication sessions type

Example

P2100# clear authentication sessions No Auth Manager sessions currently exist P2100# clear authentication sessions mac 48:5B:39:2F:A8:66

P2100# clear authentication sessions interfaces GigabitEthernet 2
P2100# clear authentication sessions session-id 0000000B002AFBE8 

Telnet Command: clear gvrp

Use this command to clear statistics or port error statistics for all interfaces or a specific interface (LAN or LAG).

Syntax Items

clear gvrp error-statistics

clear gvrp statistics

Description

Syntax Items Description
clear gvrp error-statistics	Specify a LAN/ LAG interface for clearing error statistics for GVRP.<1-10> - Enter the number (1 to 10) of LAN port.<1-8> - Enter the number (1 to 8) of LAG interface (IEEE 802.3 Link Aggregation Interface) that you want to clear the GVRP setting.Related Syntax:# clear gvrp error-statistics interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-10># clear gvrp error-statistics interfaces LAG <1-8>
clear gvrp statistics	Specify a LAN/ LAG interface for clearing statistics for GVRP.<1-10> - Specify an interface for clearing statistics for GVRP.<1-8> - Specify LAG interface for clearing statistics for GVRP.Related Syntax:# clear statistics interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-10># clear statistics interfaces LAG <1- 8>

Example

P2100# clear gvrp error-statistics interfaces GigabitEthernet 2

P2100#

P2100# clear gvrp error-statistics interfaces LAG 2

P2100#

Telnet Command: clear interfaces

Use this command to clear statistics counters for all interfaces or a specific interface (LAN or LAG).

Syntax Items

clear interfaces GigabitEthernet

clear interfaces LAG

Description

Syntax Items Description
clear interfacesGigabitEthernet	Specify a LAN interface for clearing statistics counters on that port.<1-10> - Enter the number (1 to 10) of LAN port.Related Syntax:# clear interfaces gigabitEthernet <1-10> counters
clear interfaces LAG	Specify a LAG interface for clearing statistics counters on that port.<1-8> - Enter the number (1 to 8) of LAG interface (IEEE 802.3 Link Aggregation Interface).Related Syntax:# clear interfaces LAG <1-8> counters

Example

P2100# clear interfaces gigabitethernet 3 counters
P2100# clear interfaces
P2100# clear interfaces lag 2 counters
P2100# 

Telnet Command: clear ip

Use this command to clear ARP inspection information, DHCP snooping database agent, and IGMP snooping groups (dynamic or static) information for all interfaces or a specific interface (LAN or LAG) with IP address.

Syntax Items

clear ip arp

clear ip dhcp

clear ip igmp

Description

Syntax Items Description
clear ip arp	<1-10> - Enter the number (1 to 10) of LAN port.<1-8> - Specify a LAG interface for clearing ARP inspection information.statistics - Clear the statistics for ARP inspection.Related Syntax:# clear ip arp inspection interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-10># clear ip arp inspection interfaces LAG <1-8> statistics
clear ip dhcp snooping database statistics - Clear snooping database statistics for DHCP server.
	snooping interfaces GigabitEthernet / LAG- Specify a LAN / LAG interface for clearing DHCP snooping information.<1-10> - Enter the number (1 to 10) of LAN port.<1-8> - Specify a LAG interface for clearing DHCP snooping information.Related Syntax:# clear ip dhcp snooping database statistics# clear ip dhcp snooping interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-10> statistics# clear ip dhcp snooping interfaces LAG <1-8> statistics
clear ip igmp snooping groups dynamic - Clear dynamic snooping groups of IGMP server.snooping groups static - Clear static snooping groups of IGMP server.snooping statistics - Clear snooping statistics for IGMP server.Related Syntax:# clear ip igmp snooping groups dynamic# clear ip igmp snooping groups static# clear ip igmp snooping statistics

Example

P2100# clear ip igmp snooping groups dynamic
P2100# 

Tel net Command: clear ipv6

Use this command to clear MLD snooping configuration for dynamic / static group(s) with IPv6 address.

Syntax Items

clear ipv6 mld

Description

Syntax Items Description
clear ipv6 mld snooping groups dynamic - Clear dynamic snooping groups of MLD.snooping groups static - Clear static snooping groups of MLD.Related Syntax:# clear ipv6 mld snooping groups dynamic# clear ipv6 mld snooping groups static# clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics

Example

P2100# clear ipv6
P2100# clear ipv6 mld snooping groups dynamic
P2100# clear ipv6 mld snooping groups dynamic?
<cr>
P2100# clear ipv6 mld snooping groups static 

Telnet Command: clear lacp

Use this command to clear LACP configuration for specified LAG interface or all LAG interfaces.

Syntax Items

clear lacp <1-8> counters

clear lacp counters

Description

Syntax Items Description
clear lacp <1-8>	<1-8>- Enter the number (1 to 8) of LAG interface (IEEE 802.3 Link Aggregation Interface).Related Syntax:# clear lacp <1-8> counters
clear lacp counters Clear LACP	configuration for all LAG interfaces.Related Syntax:# clear lacp counters

Example

P2100# clear lacp 1 counters
No interfaces configured in the channel group
P2100# 

Telnet Command: clear line

Use this command to clear line settings including SSH (Secure Shell) configuration and telnet daemon configuration.

Syntax Items

clear line ssh

clear line telnet

Description

Syntax Items Description
clear line ssh Clear SSH configuration for line connection.
slear line telnet Clear SSH Telnet configuration for line connection.

Example

P2100# clear line ssh
P2100# clear line telnet 

Telnet Command: clear lldp

Use this command to clear LLDP statistics or reset LLDP information.

Syntax Items

clear lldp global

clear lldp interfaces

Description

Syntax Items Description
clear lldp global Clear all of the statistics related to LLDP.
		Related Syntax:● # clear lldp global statistics
clear lldp interfaces	Specify a LAN / LAG interface for clearing LLDP information.<1-10> - Enter the number (1 to 10) of LAN port.<1-8> - Enter the number (1 to 8) of LAG interface (IEEE 802.3 Link Aggregation Interface).Related Syntax:● # clear lldp interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-10> statistics● # clear lldp interfaces LAG <1-8> statistics

Example

P2100# clear lldp global statistics

P2100#

P2100# clear lldp interfaces LAG 1 statistics

P2100# clear lldp interfaces gigabitethernet 1 statistics

P2100#

Telnet Command: clear logging

Use this command to clear log messages from the internal logging buffer and flash.

Syntax Items

clear logging buffered

clear logging file

Description

Syntax Items Description
clear logging buffered Clear the log stored in RAM.
clear logging file Clear the log stored in flash.

Example

P2100# clear logging buffered

P2100# clear logging file
P2100# 

Telnet Command: clear mac

Use this command to clear MAC configuration related to VLAN, LAG, and LAN port.

Syntax Items

clear mac

Description

Syntax Items Description
clear mac address-table <1-10>	- Enter the number (1 to 10) of LAN port.<1-8>- Enter the number (1 to 8) of LAG interface (IEEE 802.3 Link Aggregation Interface).<1-4094>- Specify a VLAN ID by entering its number.Related Syntax:# clear mac adderss-table dynamic interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-10># clear mac adderss-table dynamic interfaces LAG <1-8># clear mac adderss-table dynamic vlan <1-4094>

Example

P2100# clear mac address-table dynamic vlan 2038
P2100# clear mac address-table dynamic interfaces gigabitethernet 3
P2100# 

Telnet Command: clear mvr

Use this command to clear information for all members (including dynamic, static) of MVR.

Syntax Items

clear mvr members

Description

Syntax Items Description
clear mvr members	Clear information for dynamic / static members.Related Syntax:# clear mvr members dynamic# clear mvr members static

Example

P2100# clear mvr members dynamic
P2100# clear mvr members static
P2100# 

Telnet Command: clear spanning-tree

Use this command to clear running system information.

Syntax Items

clear spanning-tree

Description

Syntax Items Description
clear spanning-tree interfaces	Specify a LAN interface for clearing its running information.<1-10>- Enter the number (1 to 10) of LAN port.<1-8>- Enter the number (1 to 8) of LAG interface (IEEE 802.3 Link Aggregation Interface).Related Syntax:# clear spanning-tree interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-10>statistics# clear spanning-tree interfaces LAG <1-8> statistics

Example

P2100# clear spanning-tree interfaces gigabitethernet 3 statistics

P2100# clear spanning-tree interfaces LAG 1 statistics

P2100#

XIII-2-2 Clock Configuration

This command allows managing the system clock.

Telnet Command: clock set

Use this command to configure the system clock manually.

Syntax Items

clock set

Description

Syntax Items Description

clock set Set current by entering hours, minutes, seconds, month, date and year with the format listed below:- Hour, minute, second (e.g., 08:10:30).- January.- February-March-April-May-June-July-August- September- October-November- December<1-31>- Date 1 to 31.<2000-2035>- Year of 2000 to 2035.Related Syntax:● # clock set HH:MM:SSjan/ feb/ mar/ apr/ may/ jun/ jul/ aug/ sep/ oct/ nov/ dec <1-31><2000-2035>

Example

P2100# clock set 12:10:30 jan 1 2019
2019-01-01 12:10:30 UTC+8 

XIII-2-3 Configure Configuration

This command allows configuring the settings related to VigorSwitch.

Available sub-commands under Configure include:

aaa, acct, authentication, clock, custom, dos, dot1x, do, dray_surveillance, enable, end, errdisable, exit, gvrp, hostname, http, interface, ip, ipv6, jumbo-frame, lacp, lag, line, lldp, logging, logmail, loop-protection, mac, mailalert, management, management-vlan, mirror, mvr, no, openvpn, poe, port-security, qos, radius, schedule, snmp, sntp, spanning-tree, start-up, storm-control, surveillance-vlan, system, tacacs, tr069, udld, username, vlan, voice-vlan, webhook

Before configuration, you have to enter "configure" to access into next phase.

To return to previous phase, enter "exit"

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# exit
P2100# 

Telnet Command: aaa

Use this command to add a login authentication list to authenticate with local, tacacs+, radius, and none service.

Syntax Items

aaa authentication enable aaa authentication login

Description

Syntax Items Description
aaa authentication enable	Enable authentication is used only on CLI for a user trying to switch from User EXEC (>) mode to Privileged EXEC (#) mode.enable - Enable the authentication list.- Enter a string as the list name for authentication type. Default value is “default”.- Specify the authentication method by entering none, enable, tacacs+ or radius.None: Do nothing and just make user be authenticated.Enable: Use local password to authenticate.Tacacs+: Use remote Tacas+ server to authenticate.Radius: Use remote Radius server to authenticate.default - It is used to configure default enable authentication.Related Syntax:#aaa authentication enable#aaa authentication enable default- Enter a string as the list name for authentication type. Default value is “default”.
aaa authentication login	Login authentication is used when a user tries to login into the switch.- Enter a string as the list name for authentication type. Default value is “default”.-Specify the authentication method by entering none, enable, tacacs+ or radius.default - It is used to configure default login authentication.Related Syntax:#aaa authentication loginnone, enable, tacacs+, radius>#aaa authentication login default, enable, tacacs+, radius>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# aaa authentication enable LISTNAME enable
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# exit
P2100# show aaa authentication enable lists
Enable List Name Authentication Method List
default enable
LISTNAME enable
P2100# 

Tel net Command: acct

Use this command to set RADIUS / TACACS server.

Syntax Items

acct server radius

acct server tacacs

Description

Syntax Items Description
server radius	<1-65535> - Set a value to wait for a packet retransmission to the authentication server.<1-60> - Set the transmission interval (unit is second).● # acct server radius disconnect message port <1-65535>interval <1-60>
server tacacs	<1-65535> - Set a value to wait for a packet retransmission to the authentication server.<1-60> - Set the transmission interval (unit is second).● # acct server tacacs disconnect message port <1-65535>interval <1-60>

Tel net Command: authentication

Use this command to enable the global setting of 802.1x/MAC/WEB authentication network access control (default is disabled for all).

Syntax Items

authentication dot1x

authentication guest-vlan

authentication mac

authentication web

Description

Syntax Items Description
authentication dot 1x Enable	802.1x authentication by entering the word, dot 1x after authentication.Related Syntax:# authentication dot 1x
authentication guest-vlan	Configure the guest VLAN.<1-4094>- Specify a guest VLAN ID by entering its number.Related Syntax:# authentication guest-vlan <1-4094>
authentication mac	Enable MAC authentication by entering the word, mac after authentication.mac local - Local database for MAC-Based authentication. It can add local MAC authentication hosts in database.- Enter the MAC address to be added for authentication.control auth - Set a local entry control mode, auth (the host will be set to authorized) or unauth (the host will be set to unauthorized).vlan <1~4094>- Specify a VLAN ID by entering its numberreauth-period <300~4294967294>- Set a time to initiate automatic re-authentication.inactive-timeout <60~65535>- Set the inactive timeout for MAC authentication host. After the time interval, if there is no activity from the client, then it will be unauthorized by Vigor system.control unauth - Set a local entry control mode as “unauth” to let the host set as unauthorized.radius mac-case- Set RADIUS user ID with lower case or upper case.radius mac-delimiter-select RADIUS user ID delimiter. In which,colon: XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XXdot: XX.XX.XX.XX.XX.XXhyphen: XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XXnone:XXXXXXXXXXXgap <2/4/6>- Select delimiter gap.Related Syntax:#authentication mac#authentication mac localcontrol auth inactive-timeout <60~65535>#authentication mac localcontrol auth reauth-period <300~4294967294>#authentication mac localcontrol auth vlan <1~4094> #authentication mac localcontrol auth vlan<1~4094> reauth-period <300~4294967294>#authentication mac localcontrol auth vlan<1~4094> reauth-period <300~4294967294> inactive-timeout <60~65535>#authentication mac localcontrol unauth#authentication mac radius mac-case#authentication mac radius mac-delimiter●#authentication mac radius mac-delimitergap <2/4/6>
authentication web	Web - Enable web authentication by entering the word “web” after “authentication”.username- Specify a username.password- Set a password.vlan <1~4094>- Specify a VLAN ID by entering its number.reauth-period <30~4294967294>- Set a time to initiate automatic re-authentication.inactive-timeout <60~65535>- Set the inactive timeout for MAC authentication host. After the time interval, if there is no activity from the client, then it will be unauthorized by Vigor system.Related Syntax:#authentication web#authentication web local usernamepasswordinactive-timeout <60~65535)#authentication web local usernamepasswordreauth-period <300~4294967294)#authentication web local usernamepasswordreauth-period <300~4294967294}- inactive-timeout <60~65535)#authentication web local usernamepasswordvlan<1~4094)#authentication web local usernamevlan<1~4094>reauth-period <30~4294967294>inactive-timeout <60~65535>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)# authentication dotlx
P2100(config)# vlan 3
P2100(config-vlan)# exit
P2100(config)# authentication guest-vlan 3
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# exit
P2100# show authentication
Authentication dotlx state : enabled
Authentication mac state : disabled
Authentication web state : disabled
Guest VLAN : enabled (3)
Mac-auth Radius User ID Format : XXXXXXXXXXXXX
Mac-auth Local Entry :
Web-auth Local Entry :
Interface Configurations
Interface GigabitEthernet1
Admin Control : disable
Host Mode : multi-auth
Type dotlx State : disabled
Type mac State : disabled
Type web State : disabled
Type Order : dotlx
MAC/WEB Method Order : radius
Guest VLAN : disabled
Reauthentication : disabled
Max Hosts : 256
VLAN Assign Mode : static 

--More-

P2100# configure
P2100(config)# authentication mac local 00:11:22:33:00:01 control auth vlan
3 reauth-period 500 inactive-timeout 300
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# authentication mac local 00:11:22:33:00:01 control unauth
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# authentication web local username user_1 password 1234tw vlan
3 reauth-period 600 inactive-timeout 700
P2100(config)# 

Telnet Command: clock

Use this command to configure time zone, summer-time and external time source for the system clock.

Syntax Items

clock auto timezone clock source local clock source sntp clock summer-time clock timezone

Description

Syntax Items Description
clock auto timezone	VigorSwitch sets the time zone automatically.
clock source local Configure an external time source for the system clock.“local” means to use static time. It is the default setting.Related Syntax:# clock source local
clock source sntp	Configure an external time source for the system clock. “sntp” means to use SNTP time.Related Syntax:# clock source sntp
clock summer-time	Configure the system to automatically switch to summer time (daylight saving time).ACRONYM - Specify the acronym name of time zone. The acronym of the time zone will be displayed when summer time is in effect. If unspecified, the time zone acronym will be used in default. (1-4 chars)- Indicate January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November, December.<1-31> means date 1 to 31.<2000-2037> - means year of 2000 to 2035.- means hours and minutes.recurring - Summer time should start and end on the corresponding specified days every year.<1-1440>- Set the number of minutes to add during the summer time. The default number is 60.eu - The summer time is based on the European Union rules. (Start point - last Sunday in March, End point - last Sunday in October)usa - The summer time is based on the United States rules. (Start point - second Sunday in March, End point - first Sunday in November)first - The first week of the month.last - The last week of the month.- Indicate Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday.- Indicate January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November, December.- Specify the first week or the last week of the month.<1-5> - Specify the number of the week in the month.Note that the first group of month, date, hour and minute is used forconfiguring starting time, and the second group is used for configuring ending time.Related Syntax:# clock summer-time ACRONYM date<1-31><2000-2037><HH:MM><config)# clock summer-time ACRONYM recurring eu <1-1440># clock summer-time ACRONYM recurring usa <1-1440># clock summer-time ACRONYM recurring first< sun/ mon/ tue/ wed/ thu/ fri/ sat>< jan / feb / mar / apr / may / jun/ jul/ aug/ sep/ oct/ nov/ dec><HH:MM><first/ last><sun/ mon/ tue/ wed/ thu/ fri/ sat>< jan / feb / mar / apr/ may/ jun/ jul/ aug/ sep/ oct/ nov/ dec><HH:MM><1-14400># clock summer-time ACRONYM recurring last< sun/ mon/ tue/ wed/ thu/ fri/ sat>< jan / feb / mar / apr / may / jun/ jul/ aug/ sep/ oct/ nov/ dec><HH:MM><first/ last><sun/ mon/ tue/ wed/ thu/ fri/ sat>< jan / feb / mar / apr/ may/ jun/ jul/ aug/ sep/ oct/ nov/ dec><HH:MM><1-1440># clock summer-time ACRONYM recurring <1-5>< sun/ mon/ tue/ wed/ thu/ fri/ sat>< jan / feb / mar / apr / may / jun/ jul/ aug/ sep/ oct/ nov/ dec><HH:MM><1-5>< sun/ mon/ tue/ wed/ thu/ fri/ sat>< jan / feb / mar / apr / may/ jun/ jul/ aug/ sep/ oct/ nov/ dec><HH:MM><1-14400>
clock timezone ACRONYM<-12-13>minutes <0-59>	Set the time zone for display purposes.ACRONYM - Specify the acronym name of time zone. The acronym of the time zone will be displayed when summer time is in effect. If unspecified, the time zone acronym will be used in default. (1-4 chars)<-12-13>- Specify the hour offset (from -12 to +13) of time zone. minutes <0-59>- Specify the minute difference from UTC.Related Syntax:# clock timezone ACRONYM<-12-13>minutes <0-59>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)# clock source sntp
P2100(config)# exit
P2100# show clock detail
2019-01-05 06:51:23 UTC+8
Time source is sntp
Time zone:
Acronym is
Offset is UTC+8
P2100# configure
P2100(config)# clock summer-time tw date jan 30 2019 23:30 feb 1 2019 20:50
P2100(config)# exit
P2100# show clock detail
2019-01-05 07:13:49 UTC+8
Time source is sntp
Time zone:
Acronym is ACRONYM
Offset is UTC-10:08 

Summertime:
Acronym is tw
Starting and ending on a specific date.
Begins at 1 30 19 23:30
Ends at 2 1 19 20:50
Offset is 60 minutes.
P2100# configure
P2100(config)# clock summer-time ACRONYM recurring eu 1200
P2100(config)# clock summer-time ACRONYM recurring first mon jan 10:10 first sun feb 10:10 1000
P2100(config)# exit
P2100# show clock detail
2019-01-05 11:37:18 UTC+8
Time source is sntp
Time zone:
Acronym is
Offset is UTC+8
Summertime:
Acronym is ACRONYM
Recurring every year.
Begins at 1 1 1 10:10
Ends at 1 0 2 10:10
Offset is 1000 minutes. 

Telnet Command: custom

Use this command to enable the module settings.

Syntax Items

custom enable

Description

Syntax Items Description
custom enable Enable the module settings.	Related Syntax:●# custom enable

Example

P2100# configure

P2100(config)# custom enable

P2100(config)#

Telnet Command: dos

Use this command to enable specific Denial of Service (DoS) protection.

Syntax Items

dos daeqsa-deny

dos icmp-frag-pkts-deny

dos icmp-ping-max-length

dos icmpv4-ping-max-check

dos icmpv6-ping-max-check

dos ipv6-min-frag-size-check

dos ipv6-min-frag-size-length

dos land-deny

dos nullscan-deny

dos pod-deny

dos smurf-deny

dos smurf-netmask

dos syn-sportl1024-deny

dos synfin-deny

dos synrst-deny

dos tcp-frag-off-min-check

dos tcpblat-deny

dos tcphdr-min-check

dos tcphdr-min-length

dos udpblat-deny

dos xma-deny

Description

Syntax Items Description
dos daeqsa-deny	Drop the packets if the destination MAC address equals to the source MAC address.Related Syntax:# dos daeqsa-deny
dos icmp-frag-pkts-deny Drop	the fragmented ICMP packets.Related Syntax:# dos icmp-frag-pkts-deny
dos icmp-ping-max-length	Set the maximum packet size for ICMPv4/ ICMPv6 ping operation.<0-65535> - Specify a packet number.Related Syntax:# dos icmp-ping-max-length <0-65535>
dos icmpv4-ping-max-check	Check ICMPv4 ping maximum packets size and drop the packets larger than the maximum packet size defined by the command, dos icmp-ping-max-length.Related Syntax:# dos icmpv4-ping-max-check
dos icmpv6-ping-max-check	Check ICMPv6 ping maximum packets size and drop the packets larger than the maximum packet size defined by the command, icmp-ping-max-length.Related Syntax:# dos icmpv6-ping-max-check
dos ipv6-min-frag-size-check	Check minimum size of IPv6 fragments.Related Syntax:# dos ipv6-min-frag-size-check
dos ipv6-min-frag-size-length<0-65535>	Set the minimum packet size of IPv6 fragmented packets.<0-65535> - Specify a packet number.Related Syntax:# dos ipv6-min-frag-size-length <0-65535>
dos land-deny	Drop the packets if the source IP address equals to destination IP address.Related Syntax:# dos land-deny
dos nullscan-deny Drop the packets if attacked by NULL Scan.Related Syntax:# dos nullscan-deny
dos pod-deny Drop the packets if attacked by Ping of Death.Related Syntax:# dos pod-deny
dos smurf-deny Drop the packets if encountered Smurf attack.Related Syntax:# dos smurf-deny
dos smurf-netmask Set the smurf attack size.<0-32>- Enter a number as smurf attacks size.Related Syntax:# dos smurf-netmask <0-32>
dos syn-sport11024-deny Drop SYN packets with sport less than 1024.Related Syntax:# dos syn-sport11024-deny
dos synfin-deny Drop the packets with SYN and FIN bits set.Related Syntax:# dos synfin-deny
dos synrst-deny Drop the packets with SYNC and RST bits set.Related Syntax:# dos synrst-deny
dos tcp-frag-off-min-check	Drop the TCP fragmented packet with offset equals to the minimum packet size.Related Syntax:# dos tcp-frag-off-min-check
dos tcpblat-deny	Drop the packets if the source TCP port equals to destination TCP port.Related Syntax:# dos tcpblat-deny
dos tcphdr-min-check Check	the minimum TCP header and drop the TCP packets with the header smaller than the minimum size defined.Related Syntax:# dos tcphdr-min-check
dos tcphdr-min-length Set the minimum size of TCP header.<0-65535>- Specify a packet number.Related Syntax:# dos tcphdr-min-length <0-65535>
dos udpblat-deny	Drop the packets if the source UDP port equals to destination UDP port.Related Syntax:# dos udpblat-deny
dos xma-deny Drop the packets if the sequence number is zero and the FIN, URG and PSH bits are set already.Related Syntax:# dos xma-deny

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# dos icmp-ping-max-length 25252
P2100(config)# dos icmpv4-ping-max-check
P2100(config)# 

Telnet Command: dot1x

Use this command to set 802.1x configuration.

Syntax Items

dot1x

Description

Syntax Items Description
dot 1x guest-vlan <0-4094> - Enter a number as guest VLAN ID.Related Syntax:# dot 1x guest-vlan <0-4094>

Example

P2100(config)# dot1x guest-vlan 33
P2100(config)# 

Telnet Command: do

Use this command to execute a command immediately.

Syntax Items

do SEQUENCE

Description

Syntax Items Description
SEQUENCE	Enter the command that you want to execute immediately.Related Syntax: (for example)# do show info

Example

P2100(config)# do show info
System Name : P2100
System Location : Default
System Contact : Default
MAC Address : 14:49:BC:41:33:F4
IP Address : 192.168.1.11
Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
Loader Version : 2.0.0
Loader Date : Aug 30 2019 - 13:58:32
Firmware Version : 2.5.1_RC5
Firmware Date : Nov 28 2019 - 17:06:13
Firmware Revision : 1688
System Object ID : 1.3.6.1.4.1.7367
System Up Time : 3 days, 22 hours, 13 mins, 25 secs
P2100(config)# 

Telnet Command: dray\_surveillance

Use this command to enable / disable the ONVIF.

Syntax Items

dray_surveillance add

dray_surveillance direct-add

dray_surveillance set

Description

Syntax Items Description
dray_surveillance add Add an	IP device for surveillance.WORD <36-36> - Enter the UUID string of the IP camera or IP-based device.Related Syntax:# dray_surveillance add device uuid WORD <36-36># dray_surveillance add group uuid WORD <36-36>
dray_surveillance direct-add	WORD <36-36> - Enter the UUID string of the IP camera or IP-based device.Related Syntax:# dray_surveillance direct-add device uuid WORD <36-36>
dray_surveillance set	username WORD<1-32> - Enter a string as the default user name.password WORD<1-32>> - Enter a string as the default password.encptpwd WORD <1-128> - Enter a string as the encrypted key.WORD <36-36> - Enter the UUID string of the IP camera or the IP-based device.ip - Enter the IP address of the IP camera or the IP-based device.Mask - Enter the subnet mask of the IP camera or the IP-based device.vlan <1-4094> - Enter a value representing the VLAN ID.Related Syntax:# dray_surveillance set default username WORD<1-32> password WORD<1-32># dray_surveillance set default username WORD<1-32>encptpwd WORD <1-128)# dray_surveillance set device uuid WORD <36-36)# dray_surveillance set group uuid WORD <36-36)# dray_surveillance set interface ip# dray_surveillance set interface mask# dray_surveillance set vlan <1-4094>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# dray_surveillance
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# dray_surveillance add device uuid 53d7762a-c52b-4bb9-8000-305501e0f35f
P2100(config)# 

Telnet Command: enable

Use this command to configure local password with encrypted string or not.

Syntax Items

enable password enable privilege enable secret

Description

Syntax Items Description
enable password	Edit the password for each privilege level for activating authentication.<1-15> - Enter a number for specifying a privilege level. Default value is 15.Related Syntax:# enable password <1-15>
enable privilege	Edit the privilege level of the password for local user.<1-15> - Enter a number for specifying a privilege level. Default value is 15.- Enter a new string as the password.Related Syntax:# enable privilege <1-15> password (This password will NOT be encrypted.)# enable privilege <1-15> secret (This password will BE encrypted.)# enable privilege <1-15> secret encrypted (This password is copied from another configuration file. So, enter an existed and encrypted password.)
enable secret	Enter a new string as the encrypted password.Related Syntax:# enable secret PASSWORD# enable secret encrypted PASSWORD

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)# enable secret encrypted testtest
P2100(config)# exit
P2100# show running-config
P2100# ...
enable privilege 2 secret "OTE5ZTY4MmNhYzgyNWQ0MzBhNTgwZTg0MmZmMGJiYzQ="
enable secret "testtest"
vlan 2
    name "test0002"
vlan 3
    name "test0003"
vlan 5
    name "test_carrie"
voice-vlan oui-table 00:E0:BB "3COM"
voice-vlan oui-table 00:03:6B "Cisco"
voice-vlan oui-table 00:E0:75 "Veritel"
...... 

Telnet Command: end

Use this command to end current mode.

Syntax Items

end

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#end
P2100# 

Telnet Command: errdisable

Use this command to enable the auto recovery timer for port error.

Syntax Items

errdisable recovery cause errdisable recovery interval

Description

Syntax Items Description
errdisable recovery cause	Enable the auto recovery timer for port error disabled from ACL,all, ARP rate limit, STP BPDU guard, broadcast flooding, DHCP rate limit, port security, STP self-loop, unicast flooding, or unknown multicast flooding causes.Related Syntax:# erridisable recovery cause < acl / all / arp-inspection / bpduguard / broadcast-flood / dhcp-rate-limit / psecure-violation / selfloop / unicast-flood / unknown-multicast-flood >
errdisable recovery interval	Set the recovery time of the error disabled port.<30-86400> - The default value is 300 seconds.Related Syntax:# erridisable recovery interval <30-86400>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# errdisable recovery interval 600
P2100(config)# 

Telnet Command: exit

Use this command to exit current mode and return to previous mode/ phase.

Syntax Items

exit

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# exit
P2100# 

Telnet Command: gvrp

Use this command to enable the GVRP configuration. In default, the GVRP is disabled.

Syntax Items

gvrp

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)# gvrp
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# exit
P2100# show gvrp
GVRP Status
GVRP : Enabled
Join time : 200 ms
Leave time : 600 ms
LeaveAll time : 10000 ms
P2100# 

Telnet Command: hostname

Use this command to modify the network name of VigorSwitch.

Syntax Items

hostname

Description

Syntax Items Description
hostname- Enter a string as the network name for VigorSwitch.Related Syntax:# hostname

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)# hostname Switch_3F
Switch_3F(config)# 

Telnet Command: interface

Use this command to configure interface settings.

Before configuring, you have to access into next phase. See the following example:

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# interface GigabitEthernet 3
P2100(config-if)# 

Or

P2100# configure
P2100(config)# 

P2100(config)# interface range LAG 3
P2100(config-if-range)# 

Syntax Items

interface GigabitEthernet

interface vlan

interface LAG

interface range

Description

Syntax Items Description
interface GigabitEthernet	<1-10> - Specify the number of Ethernet LAN port.Related Syntax:#interface GigabitEthernet <1-10>
Interface vlan	<1-4094> - Specify the number of VLAN ID.Related Syntax:#interface vlan <1-4094>
interface LAG <1-8> - Specify the number of LAG interface.Related Syntax:#interface LAG <1-8>
Interface range	Specify an interface ranges for configuring detailed settings.Related Syntax:#interface range GigabitEthernet <1-10>#interface range LAG <1-8>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)# interface LAG 1
P2100(config-if)# 

Under (config-if) #, available sub-commands for LAN or LAG will be different. Below shows the items under Ethernet LAN:

<config-if># authentication
<config-if># back-pressure
<config-if># custom
<config-if># description
<config-if># device-check
<config-if># dos
<config-if># dot1x
<config-if># do
<config-if># dray_surveillance
<config-if># duplex
<config-if># eee
<config-if># end
<config-if># exit
<config-if># flowcontrol
<config-if># gvrp
<config-if># ip
<config-if># ipv6
<config-if># lacp
<config-if># lag
<config-if># lldp 

<config-if># loop-protection
<config-if># mac
<config-if># mvr
<config-if># no
<config-if># poe
<config-if># port-security
<config-if># power
<config-if># protected
<config-if># qos
<config-if># rate-limit
<config-if># shutdown
<config-if># spanning-tree
<config-if># speed
<config-if># storm-control
<config-if># surveillance-vlan
<config-if># switchport
<config-if># udld
<config-if># vlan
<config-if># voice-vlan 

Description

Syntax Items Description
authentication	Apply Auth Manager Port Configuration Commands to the specified interface (Ethernet port/ LAG port).dot1x - Execute the 802.1x authentication.guest-vlan - Authenticate the guest VLAN configuration.host-mode- Set the host mode for authentication on this port.max-hosts <1-256> - Set the maximum number of authenticated hoss allowed on this port.method- Set authentication method by using local or RADIUS server.order- Add an authentication type to the order list.port-control- Set the port state of this port as AUTO, Authorized or Unauthorized.radius- attributes vlan reject - If the Radius server authorizes the supplicant, but does not provide a supplicant VLAN, the supplicant will be rejected. If the parameter is omitted, the option is applied by default.radius- attributes vlan static - If the Radius server authorizes the supplicant but does not provide asupplicant VLAN, the supplicant will be accepted.reauth - Enable/ Disabel Reauthentication for this porttimer<60-65535>- Set the time value for authentication. After the time interval, if there is no activity from the client, it will be unauthorized.timer quiet <0-65535>- Set the time value to wait failed authentication exchange.timer reauth <300-4294967294>- Set the time value. After the time interval, an automatic re-authentication should be initiated.web - Execute the web-based authentication.web max-login-attempts <3-10>- Set a maximum number of login attempts on the port.web max-login-attempts infinite - No limit for login attempts.Related Syntax:# authentication dot1x# authentication guest-vlan# authentication host-mode# authentication mac# authentication max-hosts <1-256)# authentication method# authentication order# authentication port-control# authentication radius-attributes vlan reject# authentication radius-attributes vlan static# authentication reauth# authentication timer inactive <60-65535)# authentication timer quiet <0-65535)# authentication timer reauth <300-4294967294)# authentication web# authentication web max-login-attempts <3-10)# authentication web max-login-attempts infinite
back-pressure	Enable back-pressure for the specified interface (Ethernet port/LAG port).Related Syntax:# back-pressure
custom	- Enable the custom module configuration for the specified interface (Ethernet port/LAG port).Related Syntax:# custom enable
description	Write a description for the specified interface (Ethernet port/LAG port).- Enter a description (up to 32 characters).Related Syntax:# descripton
device-check	Perform a device check the specified interface (Ethernet port/LAG port).ip-address-Anter the IP address of the device.interval <120/ 15/ 30/ 60>- Check the device interval by entering the time value. Unit is second.retry <1/ 3/ 5>- Enter the retry time during a checking period.Failure-action- Set the power cycle.Related Syntax:# device-check ip-addressinterval <120/ 15/ 30/ 60>retry <1/ 3/ 5>failure-action
dos	Apply DoS to the specified interface (Ethernet port/LAG port).
dot 1x It is available for Gigabit	Ethernet port only.guest-vlan - Set guest VLAN configuration.max-req <1-10>- Set the maximum request retries. Default is 2.Port-control- Set the port control value (auto, authorized or unauthorized)reauth - Enable/ disable the reauthentication for this port.timeout-set timeout value for this port.<0-65535>- Set a value as quiet period (default is 60-second).<300-4294967294>- Set a value as re-authentication period. (defaultis 3600-second).<1-65535> - Set a value to wait for a packet retransmission to the authentication server.supp-timeout <1-65535> - Set a vale as supplicant timeout period.tx-period <1-65535> - Set a value to wait for a response to an EAP-request / identity before resending the request.Related Syntax:# dot1x guest-vlan# dot1x max-req <1-10># dot1x port-control/# dot1x reauth# dot1x timeout quiet-period <0-65535># dot1x timeout reauth-period <300-4294967294># dot1x timeout server-timeout <1-65535># dot1x timeout supp-timeout <1-65535># dot1x timeout tx-period <1-65535>
do Run execution commands in current mode.
dray_surveillance Use this command to set the ONVIF throughput alert threshold.<16-1000000> - Specify a number as the alert threshold for egress / ingress throughput.Related Syntax:# dray_surveillance set threshold alert egress <16-1000000>- force full duplex operation.- Force half-duplex operation.Related Syntax:# duplex
duplex	Apply the duplex configuration to the specified interface (Ethernet port/LAG port).- Auto duplex configuration.- Force full duplex operation.- Force half-duplex operation.Related Syntax:# duplex
eee	Apply the EEE configuration to the specified interface (Ethernet port).
end End current mode, change to enable mode and return to previous phase.
exit Exit from current mode.
flowcontrol	Configure flow-control mode to the specified interface (Ethernet port/LAG port).- Enable AUTO flow-control configuration.- Disable the force flow-control.- Enable the force flow-control.Related Syntax:# flowcontrol
gvrp	Apply the GVRP configuration to the specified interface (Ethernet port/LAG port).registration-mode- Set registration mode for GVRP. When registration-mode is fixed or forbidden, it will remove the dynamic port from VLAN.vlan-creation-forbid - Do not remove dynamic port from VLAN.Related Syntax:# gvrp registration-modenormal>●# gvrp vlan-creation-forbid
ip	Apply IP configuration to the specified interface (Ethernet port/ LAG port).acl-Specify an ACL for packets. Enter the name of the ACL.arp inspection rate-limit <1-10>- ARP inspection is to enable Dynamic ARP Inspection function. Set the rate limitation (1 - 10) on the interface. VigorSwitch will drop ARP packets after receives more than configured rate of packets per second.arp inspection trust - Use it to set trusted interface.arp inspection validate dst-mac - It means the switch will drop ARP reply packets if arp-target-mac and ethernet-dst-mac are not matched.arp inspection validate ip allow-zeros - The “allow-zeros” means the switch will not drop all zero IP address.arp inspection validate src-mac - It means the switch will drop ARP requests and reply packets if arp-sender-mac and ethernet-source-mac are not matched.conflict prevention bind-ip- conflict prevention port-type DHCP-Client -conflict prevention port-type DHCP-Client has-server -conflict prevention port-type DHCP-Server -conflict prevention port-type DHCP-Server has-server -conflict prevention port-type Multiple-Hosts -conflict prevention port-type Multiple-Hosts has-server -conflict prevention port-type Static-Binding -conflict prevention port-type Static-Binding has-server -dhcp snooping option - Use it to enable the function of inserting option82 content into the packet.dhcp snooping option action- Use it to set the action (drop, keep or replace) when receiving packets with option82 content.dhcp snooping option circuit-id- Use it to set user-defined circuit-id string (1 to 63 characters).dhcp snooping rate-limit <1-300>- Use it to set rate limitation on the interface.dhcp snooping trust - Use it to set trusted interface.dhcp snooping verify mac-address - Use it to verify MAC address function on the interface.dhcp snooping vlan <1-4094> option circuit-id- Set user-defined circuit-id string for specified VLAN ID.igmp filter <1-128>- Use it to bind a profile for a port. Specify a profile ID.igmp max-groups <0-256>- Use it to limit port learning max group number (0-256).igmp max-groups action- Use it to set the action (deny or replace) when the number of groups reach the limitation. source binding max-entry <1-10>- source binding max-entry no-limit -source verify mac-and-ip - Use it to enable IP source guard function.Related Syntax:# ip acl# ip arp inspection rate-limit <1-10># ip arp inspection trust# ip arp inspection validate dst-mac# ip arp inspection validate ip allow-zeros# ip arp inspection validate src-mac# ip conflict prevention bind-ip# ip conflict prevention port-type DHCP-Client# ip conflict prevention port-type DHCP-Client has-server# ip conflict prevention port-type DHCP-Server# ip conflict prevention port-type DHCP-Server has-server# ip conflict prevention port-type Multiple-Hosts# ip conflict prevention port-type Multiple-Hosts has-server# ip conflict prevention port-type Static-Binding# ip conflict prevention port-type Static-Binding has-server# ip dhcp snooping option# ip dhcp snooping option action# ip dhcp snooping option circuit-id# ip dhcp snooping rate-limit <1-300># ip dhcp snooping trust# ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address# ip dhcp snooping vlan <1-4094> option circuit-id# ip igmp filter <1-128># ip igmp max-groups <0-256># ip igmp max-groups action# ip source binding max-entry <1-10># ip source binding max-entry no-limit# ip source verify mac-and-ip
ipv6	Apply IPV6 configuration to the specified interface (Ethernet port/ LAG port).acl-Specify the ACL name for packets mld- Set IPv6 filter for MLD configuration.mld max-groups - Specify the number for maximum group.<0-256>- MLD snooping group number.action- Define the action to be performed when excessing the maximum group.Related Syntax:# ipv6 acl# ipv6 mld filter# ipv6 mld max-groups <0-256># ipv6 mld max-groups action
Iacp	Apply LACP Configuration to the specified interface (Ethernet port/ LAG port).<1-65535>- Set a number for IEEE 802.3 link aggregation port priority.- Set long or short timeout value.Related Syntax:# lacp port-priority <1-65535># lacp timeout
lag	Apply Link Aggregation Group Configuration the specified interface (Ethernet port/ LAG port).<1-8>- Specify LAG number.Related Syntax:# lag <1-8>
loop-protection	Record the log, shutdown the port or follow the global loop-protection settings for each port.Related Syntax:# loop-protection action all# loop-protection action global# loop-protection action log# loop-protection action shutdown
lldp med location - Configure the LLDP MED location data. The “coordinate”, “civic-address”, “ecs-elin” locations are independent, so at most three location TLVs could be sent if their data are not empty.med network-policy add / remove - Configure the LLDP MED network policy table. Add / remove a network policy entry that can be bind to ports.med tlv-select - Configure LLDP MED TLVs selection. Available optional TLVs are network-policy, location, inventory and poe-pse. tlv-select - Select LLDP TLVs to send.- The location is specified as civic address.- Range from 6 to 160 hexadecimal bytes.- The location is specified as coordinates.- 16 hexadecimal bytes exactly.- The location is specified as ECS ELIN.- 10 to 25 hexadecimal bytes.- Range from 1 to 32.- LLDP optional TLV, pick from: port-desc, sys-name, sys-desc, sys-cap, mac-phy, lag, max-frame-size, management-addr.pvid - Enable or disable the TX optional-TLV 802.1 PVID.vlan-name <2-4094> - Add/ remove a selected VLAN. Enter the VLAN ID number.- Enable LLDP reception on interface.- Enable LLDP transmission on interface.Related Syntax:# lldp med location# lldp med network-policy add# lldp med network-policy remove# lldp med tlv-select# lldp tlv-select<2-4094>- Enter a name for ACL.
mac Specify an access control	list for packets.Before configuring, you have to create an ACL based on MAC address. For example,# mac acl CA_ACL# - Enter a name for ACL.Related Syntax:●# mac acl
mvr Make MVR configuration.	immediate - Enable MVR function.type- Specify MVR port type as receiver or source.Related Syntax:●# mvr immediate●# mvr type
no	Negate command. Such command can disable current setting of command executed and return to the factory setting of that command.Example:# no mvrThe operation will make mvr setting is default. Continue?[yes/ no]:yes#Related Syntax:●# no
poe Enable or disable the PoE	port.
port-security	port-security - Enable the port security functionality. Default is disabled.address-limit <1-256>- Enter the number as limitation for MAC address.action- Speify an action to be performed.Related Syntax:●# port-security●# port-security adderss-limit <1-256>action
power Configure the inline power for the PoE device.inline auto - Turn on the PoE device discovery protocol and apply the power to the devcie.inline never - Turn off the PoE device power.power-limit <15.4w/ 30w/ MW>- Set the power limit for the PoE device.priority <1-3/ critical/ high/ low>- Set the priority of power application for the PoE device.schedule-index - Specify the index number of the schedule profile.Related Syntax:●# power inline auto●# power inline never●# power power-limit <15.4w/ 30w/ MW>●# power priority <1-3/ critical/ high/ low>●# power schedule-index
protected	Configure an interface to be a protected port.Related Syntax:●#protected
qos	cos - Configure the default CoS value for an Ethernet port.<0-7>- Specify a CoS value for the selected interface. Default value is 0.remark - Configure remarking state of each port.trust - Configure each port to trust state while the system is in “basic” mode. There are four trust types for a device to judge the appropriate queue of the packets.- Enable cos remarking.- Enable DSCP remarking.- Enable cos and DSCP remarking.- Enable IP precedence remarking.Related Syntax:#qos cos <0-7>#qos remark#qos trust
rate-limit It is effective for Ethernet port only.egress - Configure the egress port shaper.ingress - Configure the ingress port shaper.egress queue - Configure queue for egress port shaper.<0-1000000> - Enter a number as the average traffic rate in Kbps. It must be a multiple of 16.<16-1000000> - Enter a number as the average traffic rate in Kbps. It must be a multiple of 16.<1-8> - Specify a nubmer as queue ID.Related Syntax:# rate-limit egress <0-1000000># rate-limit egress queue <1-8> <16-1000000># rate-limit ingress <16-1000000>
shutdown Disable the selected interface.Example:(config)# interface gigabitethernet 3(config-if)# shutdown(config-if)# exit(config)# exit# show interface Gigabitethernet 3GigabitEthernet3 is downRelated Syntax:# shutdown
spanning-tree Configure spanning-tree settings.bpdu-filter - Set the BPDU-Filter for specified port.bpdu-guard - Set the BPDU-Guard for specified port.edge - Set the edge-port for specified port.cost - Change an interface's spanning tree path cost.link-type - Specify a link type for spanning tree protocol use.mcheck - Set the mcheck for specified port to migrate.mst - Set spanning-tree parameters of instance.port-priority- Set the priority for specified instance.<0-200000000> - Specify a value of internal path cost (0 means Auto).- The selected port will be treated as point-to-point.- The selected port will be treated as shared.<0-15> - Specify an instance ID.<0-240> - Specify a priority number for the selected port.Related Syntax:# spanning-tree# spanning-tree# spanning-tree cost <0-200000000># spanning-tree link-type# spanning-tree mcheck# spanning-tree mst <0-15> cost <0-200000000>
	●# spanning-tree port-priority <0-240>
speed Configure speed operation.	<10/ 100/ 1000> - Force 10/ 100/ 1000 Mbps operation.- Enable Auto speed configuration.Related Syntax:●# speed<10/ 100/ 1000>●# speed auto
storm-control	action - Select an action for storm control after exceeding the threshold.broadcast level - Enable the storm control type of broadcast for the selected port.unknown-multicast level - Enable the storm control type of unknown-multicast for the selected port.unknown-unicast level- Enable the storm control type of unknown-unicast for the selected port.- Drop packets after exceeding storm control threshold.- Disable the port after exceeding storm control threshold.<1-1000000> - Specify the rate value.Related Syntax:●# storm-control action●# storm-control broadcast level <1-1000000>●# storm-control unknown-multicast level <1-1000000>●# storm-control unknown-unicast level <1-1000000>
surveillance-vlan	cos - Set surveillance VLAN configuration.mode - Set surveillance member port join mode.- QoS attributes are applied to all packets that are classified to the Surveillance VLAN.- QoS attributes are applied only on packets from IP phones.- Make surveillance member port join voice VLAN automatically.- The administrator manually makes surveillance member port join voice VLAN.Related Syntax:●# surveillance-vlan cos●# surveillance-vlan mode
switchport Set switching mode characteristics.	access vlan -Use it to set a native VLAN on the interface.default-vlan tagged - Use it to make the selected port interface to become the default VLAN tagged member.forbidden default-vlan - Use it to forbid the defult-vlan on the interface.forbidden vlan - Use it to forbid a vlan on the interface.hybrid accetable-frame-type - Use it to choose which type of frame will be accepted.hybrid allowed - Use it to allow a VALN set on the interface.hybrid ingress-filtering - Use it to enable VLAN ingress filter.hybrid pvid - Use it to set PVID of the interface.mode access - Use it to configure the selected port as the role of access. Only untagged frames will be accepted.mode hybrid - Use it to configure the selected port as the role of hybrid. Support all functions defined in IEEE 802.1Q specification.mode trunk uplink - Use it to configure the selected port as the roleof trunk. It can recognize double tagging on the interface.trunk allowed - Use it to allow a VALN on the interface.trunk native - Use it to set a native VLAN on the interface.tunnel vlan - Use it to set a Dot1q tunnel VLAN on the interface.vlan tpid - Use it to set TPID on the interface.<1-4094> - Specify a VLAN ID.- Add or remove the allowed VLAN list.- Specify an option for accepting all frames, only tagged frames or only untagged frames.<1-4094/ all> - Specify a VLAN ID or all VLAN IDs.< 0x8100 / 0x88A8 / 0x9100 / 0x9200> - Specify one tag-protocol-id.Related Syntax:# switchport access vlan <1-4094)# switchport default-vlan tagged# switchport forbidden default-vlan# switchport forbidden vlan <1-4094)# switchport hybrid accetable-frame-type# switchport hybrid allowed vlan add <1-4094)# switchport hybrid allowed vlan add <1-4094)# switchport hybrid allowed vlan remove <1-4094)# switchport hybrid ingress-filtering# switchport hybrid pvid <1-4094)# switchport mode# switchport mode trunk uplink# switchport trunk allowed vlan<1-4094/ all)# switchport trunk native <1-4094)# switchport tunnel vlan <1-4094)# switchport vlan tpid < 0x8100/ 0x88A8 / 0x9100 / 0x9200>
udId	Configure UDLD enabled or disabled and ignore global UDLD setting. aggressive - Enable UDLD protocol on such interface.Related Syntax:# udld# udld aggressive
vlan	mac-vlan group - Set a MAC-based VLAN configuration.protocol-vlan group - Set a protocol-based VLAN configuration.<1-2147483647> - Specify a group ID to map.<1-4094> - Specify a VLAN ID.Related Syntax:# vlan mac-vlan group <1-2147483647> vlan <1-4094)# vlan protocol-vlan group<1-2147483647> vlan <1-4094>
voice-vlan cos - Set voice VLAN	Configuration as COS mode.mode - Set voice member port join mode.- QoS attributes are applied on all packets that are classified to the Voice VLAN.- QoS attributes are applied only on packets from IP phones.- Make voice member port join voice VLAN automatically.- The administrator manually makes voice member portjoin voice VLAN.Related Syntax:# voice-vlan cos# voice-vlan mode

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)# interface LAG 1
P2100(config-if)# speed 100
P2100(config-if)# backpressure
P2100(config-if)# lldp med location ecs-elin 112233445566778899AA
P2100(config-if)# vlan mac-vlan group 35 vlan 1000
P2100(config-if)# 

Tel net Command: ip

Use this command to create an IPv4 access list (ACL) which performs classification on layer 3 fields and enters ip-access configuration mode.

Syntax Items

ip acl
ip address
ip arp
ip conflict
ip default-gateway
ip dhcp
ip dns
ip forcedhttps
ip http
ip https
ip igmp
ip route
ip source
ip ssh
ip telnet 

Description

Syntax Items Description
ip acl	acl- Set the name of the access list (ACL) based on IPv4.To configure detailed settings, enter the name of ACL to access intonext level.#ip aclThen, available sub-command includes:#deny#do#end#exit#permit#sequence#show
	Use the “deny” command to create deny rules for the IPv4 access list.<0-255/ egp/ hmp/ icmp/ igp/ ipinip/ ipv6 / ipv6:frag / ipv6:icmp/ ipv6:rout / ip / l2tp / ospf / pim / rdp / rsvp / tcp / udp > - Specify theIP protocol number or enter the name of the protocol./- Specify the source anddestination IPv4 addresses and subnet masks.dscp <0-63> - Set the DSCP filtering by specifying a value for DSCP.precedence <0-7> - Set the cos value and the cos mask for a packet.shutdown - Disable the Ethernet interface.any - Any IP address (as source or destination).Related Syntax:#deny <0-255>/dscp <0-63>#deny <0-255>/shutdown#deny <0-255>/precedence <0-7>#deny <0-255>/supdownany dscp<0-63>#deny <0-255>/dscp<0-63> shutdownany dscp<0-63> shutdown#deny <0-255>/supdownany dscp<0-63> shutdown#deny <0-255>/supdownany any dscp <0-7> shutdown#deny <0-255>/supdownany any dscp <0-7> shutdownany any precedence <0-7> any any precedence <0-7> shutdown
	Use the “do” command to run execution command in current mode.-Related Syntax:#do
	Use the “end” command to finish current mode. Any changes incurrent mode will be saved.Related Syntax:#end
	Use the “exit” command to close the current CLI session or return tothe previous mode without saving the settings.Related Syntax:#exit
	Use the “no sequence” command to delete any entry in managementACL.<1-2147483647>- Specify an index number of the ACL.Related Syntax:#no sequence <1-2147483647>
	Use the “permit” command to create permit rules which bypass thepackets meet the rule.<0-255/ egp/ icmp/ igp/ ipinip/ ipv6 / ipv6:frag / ipv6:icmp/ ipv6: rout / ip / 12tp / ospf / pim / rdp / rsvp / tcp / udp > - Specify theIP protocol number or enter the name of the protocol./- Specify the source anddestination IPv4 addresses and subnet masks.dscp <0-63> - Set the DSCP filtering by specifying a value for DSCP.precedence <0-7> - Set the cos value and the cos mask for a packet.Shutdown - Disable the Ethernet interface.any - Any IP address (as source or destination).Related Syntax:#permit <0-255>/<A.B.C.D>/<A.B.C.D>/dscp <0-63>#permit <0-255>/<A.B.C.D>/<A.B.C.D>/<A.B.C.D>/dscp <0-63>shutdown#permit <0-255>/<A.B.C.D>/<A.B.C.D>/<A.B.C.D>/precedence <0-7)#permit <0-255>/<A.B.C.D>/<A.B.C.D>/precedence <0-7>shutdownany any dscp <0-63>#permit <0-255> any any dscp <0-7>shutdown#permit <0-255> any any precedence <0-7>#permit <0-255> any any precedence <0-7>shutdown
	Use the “sequence” command to deny or permit the ACL.<1-2147483647> - Enter the sequence of ACL entry. The sequence represents the priority of the ACE in the ACL.Related Syntax:#sequence <1-2147483647> deny#sequence <1-2147483647> permit
	Use the “show acl” command to list current status of the selected ACL.
ip address	Use this command to modify the administration IPv4 address.address- Specify the IPv4 addresses. This IP is required when the administer wants to access into VigorSwitch through Telnet, SSH, HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP and so on.mask - Specify the netmask of the IP address.Related Syntax:#ip addressmask
ip arp	Use this command to enable the function of dynamic ARP inspection.vlan <1-4094> - Specify the VLAN ID number.Related Syntax:#ip arp inspection:#ip arp inspection vlan <1-4094>
ip conflict Use this command	to do IP conflict prevention.lag - Enable/ disable the function.- Specify the IPv4 addresses.<1-10> - Specify a physical port.<1-8> - Specify a LAG port.<1-4094> - Specify a VLAN ID number.Related Syntax:#ip conflict detection#ip conflict lag#ip conflict prevention#ip conflict prevention bindingvlan<1-4094>GigabitEthernet <1-10> server#ip conflict prevention bindingvlan<1-4094>GigabitEthernet <1-10> static#ip conflict prevention bindingvlan<1-4094>LAG <1-8> server#ip conflict prevention bindingvlan<1-4094>LAG <1-8> static#ip conflict prevention binding vlan <1-4094><A.B.C.D>interface GigabitEthernet <1-10> server#ip conflict prevention binding vlan <1-4094><A.B.C.D>interface GigabitEthernet <1-10> static#ip conflict prevention binding vlan <1-4094><A.B.C.D>interface LAG<1-8> server#ip conflict prevention binding vlan <1-4094><A.B.C.D>interface LAG<1-8> static#ip conflict prevention server-ipinterface GigabitEthernet <1-10>#ip conflict prevention server-ipinterface LAG <1-8>
ip default-gateway Use this command to modify default gateway address.	address- Specify the IPv4 addresses.Related Syntax:#ip default-gateway
ip dhcp	Use this command to enable DHCP client to get IP address from remote DHCP server,database- Write the database to FLASH or remote TFTP server. Set timeout interval for abortion. Set delay timer for writing to URL.- Specify the IPv4 addresses.- Enter the name of the host.- Set a name for the backup file.<0-86400>- Enter a value. Unit is second.<15-86400>- Enter a value. Unit is second.option - Configure DHCP-Option82 settings by specifying remote ID number.- Enter a string (from 1 to 63 characters) for the DHCP option.vlan - Configure VLAN settings.<1-4094>- Specify the VLAN ID number.Related Syntax:#ip dhcp snooping#ip dhcp snooping database#ip dhcp snooping database flash#ip dhcp snooping database tftp#ip dhcp snooping database tftp#ip dhcp snooping database timeout <0-86400>#ip dhcp snooping database write-delay <15-86400>#ip dhcp snooping option remote-id#ip dhcp snooping vlan <1-4094>
ip dns	Use this command to modify DNS server configuration.-A.B.C.D> - Specify the IP address as primary DNS server.- Sepcify two IP addresses as primary and secondary DNS server.- Specify the MAC address as primary DNS server.- Specify two MAC addresses as primary and secondary DNS server.lookup - Enable the IP domain naming system lookup.Related Syntax:#ip dns#ip dns#ip dns#ip dns- Enter the authentication method list name.Session-timeout - Set the session timeout.<0-86400> - Set the timeout value. 0 means no timeout.Related Syntax:#ip http login authentication#ip http session-timeout <0-86400>
ip forcedhttps	Use this command to enable the function of forced HTTPS configuration.Related Syntax:#ip forcedhttps
ip http	Use this command to enable the function of HTTP configuration.Login - Set login authentication.- Enter the authentication method list name.Session-timeout - Set the session timeout.<0-86400> - Set the timeout value. 0 means no timeout.Related Syntax:#ip https login authentication#ip https session-timeout <0-86400>
ip https	Use this command to enable the function of HTTPS configuration.Login - Set login authentication.- Enter the authentication method list name.Session-timeout - Set the session timeout.<0-86400> - Set the timeout value. 0 means no timeout.Related Syntax:#ip https login authentication#ip https session-timeout <0-86400>
ip igmp Use this command to	set IGMP profile and enable IGMP snooping function.Profile - Set IGMP profile.<1-128> - Enter the index number of IGMP profile to access into next phase for configuring detailed settings.- Specify the source and destination IPv4 addressesaction- Speicfy the rule (deny/ permit) for the IGMP profile.snooping forward-method- Set the forward method.snooping report-suppression - Set the IGMP v1 or v2 report suppression.snooping unknown-multicast action drop / flood/ router-port- Set unknown multicast. The packets will be dropped, flood, or forwarded to the router ports.snooping version <2/ 3> - Set the IGMP snooping operation version.snooping vlan- Set a VLAN ID (1 to 4094) for the IGMP VLAN configuration.forbidden-port GigabitEthernt <1 to 10> / LAG <1 to 8> - Specify an interface for the IPv4 forbidden port configuration.immediate-leave - Enable the IGMP snooping immediate-leave function.

last-member-query-count <1-7>- Set a value as the Last Member Query Count. last-member-query-interval <1-25> - Set the time interval. querier - Enable the querier for the IGMP VLAN configuration. querier <2/3> - Set the querier version (Version 2 or Version 3). query-interval <30-18000> - Set the time interval for the query. response-time <5-20> - Set the response time. robustness-variable <1-7> - Set the robustness variable. router learn pim-dvmrp - Enable the IGMP snooping router port learn by PIM, DVMRP and IGMP messages. static-group - Specify the IPv4 multicast address. interfaces GigabitEthernt <1 to 10>/ LAG <1 to 8> - Specify an interface. static-port GigabitEthernt <1 to 10>/ LAG <1 to 8> - Set the static port for an interface. static-router-port GigabitEthernt <1 to 10>/ LAG <1 to 8> - Set the static router port for an interface.

Related Syntax:

• #ip igmp profile <1-128>
  # do
  # end
  # exit
  # profile range ip
  # profile range ip action
  # profile range ip action
  # show
• #ip igmp snooping
  #ip igmp snooping forward-method
• #ip igmp snooping report-suppression
• #ip igmp snooping unknown-multicast action
• #ip igmp snooping version <2/3>
  #ip igmp snooping vlan forbidden-port GigabitEthernt <1 to 10>
  #ip igmp snooping vlan forbidden-port LAG <1 to 8>
• #ip igmp snooping vlan forbidden-router-port GigabitEthernt <1 to 10>
• #ip igmp snooping vlan forbidden-router-port LAG <1 to 8>
  #ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave
• #ip igmp snooping vlan last-member-query-count <1-7>
• #ip igmp snooping vlan last-member-query-interval <1-25>
  #ip igmp snooping vlan querier
  #ip igmp snooping vlan querier <2/3>
  #ip igmp snooping vlan query-interval <30-18000>
  #ip igmp snooping vlan response-time <5-20>
  #ip igmp snooping vlan robustness-variable <1-7>
  #ip igmp snooping vlan router learn

	pim-dvmrp# ip igmp snooping vlanstatic-groupinterfaces GigabitEthernt <1 to 10># ip igmp snooping vlanstatic-groupinterfaces LAG <1 to 8># ip igmp snooping vlanstatic-port GigabitEthernt <1 to 10># ip igmp snooping vlanstatic-port LAG <1 to 8># ip igmp snooping vlanstatic-router-port GigabitEthernt <1 to 10># ip igmp snooping vlanstatic-router-port LAG <1 to 8>
ip route Use this command to create a static route.- Specify the source IPv4 address.vlan <1-4094>- Specify the VLAN ID number.mask-> Specify the subnet mask.Related Syntax:# ip route# ip route@gateway# ip routemask	Create a static route.- Specify the source IPv4 address.vlan <1-4094>- Specify the VLAN ID number.mask-> Specify the subnet mask
ip source	Use this command to create a static IP source binding entry.- Enter the MAC address for the binding entry.vlan <1-4094>- Specify the VLAN ID number.- Specify the source and destination IPv4 addresses and net mask.<1-10>- Specify a physical port.<1-8>- Specify a LAG port.Related Syntax:# ip source bindingvlan <1-4094><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.D><A.B.C.
ip ssh	Use this command to generate the key files for SSH connection.- Select the key files for SSH connection.Related Syntax:# ip ssh
ip telnet Use this command to enable telent service.Related Syntax:# ip telnet

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)# ip acl market_1
P2100(config-ip-acl)#
P2100(config-ip-acl)# deny 20 192.168.2.55/255.255.255.0 192.168.2.85/255
P2100(config)# ip dhcp snooping database tftp draytek carrie_backup 

Use the "do" command to run execution command in current mode.

	-Related Syntax:#do
	Use the “end” command to finish current mode. Any changes in current mode will be saved.Related Syntax:#end
	Use the “exit” command to close the current CLI session or return to the previous mode without saving the settings.Related Syntax:#exit
	Use the “no sequence” command to delete any entry in management ACL.<1-2147483647>- Specify an index number of the ACL.Related Syntax:#no sequence <1-2147483647>
	Use the “permit” command to create permit rules which bypass the packets meet the rule.<0-255/ icmp/ ipv6/ tcp / udp > - Specify the IP protocol number or enter the name of the protocol.<0-255/ any> - Specify ICMPv6 number./ <0-128> - Specify the source/ destination IPv6 addresses and subnet masks.dscp <0-63> - Set the DSCP filtering by specifying a value for DSCP. precedence <0-7> - Set the cos value and the cos mask for a packet. shutdown - Disable the Ethernet interface.any - Any IP address (as source or destination).<0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data / hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www> <0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data / hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www> - Set TCP port.match-all - Set TCP flags. List of TCP flags that should occur. If a flag should be set, it is p refixed by “+”. If a flag should be unset, it is prefixed by “-”. Avai lable options are +urg, +ack, +psh, +rst, +syn, +fin, -urg, -ack, -psh, -rst, -syn and -fin. To define more than 1 flag - enter additional flags one after another without a space (example +syn-ack).<0-65535/ PORT_RANGE / any / bootpc / bootps / discard / domain / echo / nameserver / netbios-ns / ntp / rip / snmp / snmptrap / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / tftp / time / who> <0-65535/ PORT_RANGE / any / bootpc / bootps / discard / domain / echo / nameserver / netbios-ns / ntp / rip / snmp / snmptrap / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / tftp / time / who> - Set UDP port.Related Syntax:#permit <0-255> <X:X::X:X> / <0-128> <X:X::X:X> / <0-128> #permit <0-255> <X:X::X:X> / <0-128> <X:X::X:X> / <0-128> dscp <0-63> #permit <0-255> <X:X::X:X> / <0-128> <X:X::X:X> / <0-128> dscp <0-63> shutdown #permit <0-255> <X:X::X:X> / <0-128> <X:X::X:X> / <0-128> precedence <0-7> #permit <0-255> <X:X::X:X> / <0-128> <X:X::X:X> / <0-128> precedence <0-7> shutdown

# permit <0-255> /<0-128> /<0-128> shutdown
- # permit <0-255> /<0-128> any dscp <0-63>
- # permit <0-255> /<0-128> any dscp <0-63> shutdown
- # permit <0-255> /<0-128> any precedence <0-7>
- # permit <0-255> /<0-128> any precedence <0-7>shutdown
- # permit <0-255> /<0-128> any shutdown
- permit icmp /<0-128> /<0-128> <0-255 / any / destination-unreachable / echo-reply / echo-request / nd-na / nd-ns / packet-too-big/ parameter-problem/ router-advertisement / router-solicitation / time-exceeded> <0-255/ any> dscp <0-63>
- # permit icmp /<0-128> /<0-128><0-255 / any / destination-unreachable / echo-reply / echo-request / nd-na / nd-ns / packet-too-big/ parameter-problem/ router-advertisement / router-solicitation / time-exceeded> <0-255/ any> dscp <0-63> shutdown
- # permit icmp /<0-128> /<0-128><0-255 / any / destination-unreachable / echo-reply / echo-request / nd-na / nd-ns / packet-too-big/ parameter-problem/ router-advertisement / router-solicitation / time-exceeded> <0-255/ any> precedence <0-7>
- # permit icmp /<0-128> /<0-128><0-255 / any / destination-unreachable / echo-reply / echo-request / nd-na / nd-ns / packet-too-big/ parameter-problem/ router-advertisement / router-solicitation / time-exceeded> <0-255/ any> precedence <0-7> shutdown
- # permit icmp /<0-128> /<0-128><0-255 / any / destination-unreachable / echo-reply / echo-request / nd-na / nd-ns / packet-too-big/ parameter-problem/ router-advertisement / router-solicitation / time-exceeded> <0-255/ any> shutdown
- # permit icmp /<0-128> any <0-255 / any / destination-unreachable / echo-reply / echo-request / nd-na / nd-ns / packet-too-big/ parameter-problem/ router-advertisement / router-solicitation / time-exceeded> <0-255 / any> dscp <0-63>
- # permit icmp /<0-128> any <0-255 / any / destination-unreachable / echo-reply / echo-request / nd-na / nd-ns / packet-too-big/ parameter-problem/ router-advertisement / router-solicitation / time-exceeded> <0-255 / any> dscp <0-63> shutdown
- # permit icmp /<0-128> any <0-255 / any / destination-unreachable / echo-reply / echo-request / nd-na / nd-ns / packet-too-big/ parameter-problem/ router-advertisement / router-solicitation / time-exceeded> <0-255 / any> precedence <0-7>
- # permit icmp /<0-128> any <0-255 / any / destination-unreachable / echo-reply / echo-request / nd-na / nd-ns / packet-too-big/ parameter-problem/ router-advertisement / router-solicitation / time-exceeded> <0-255 / any> precedence <0-7> shutdown
- # permit icmp /<0-128> any <0-255 / any / destination-unreachable / echo-reply /

echo-request / nd-na / nd-ns / packet-too-big/parameter-problem/ router-advertisement /router-solicitation / time-exceeded> <0-255 / any> shutdown●# permit ipv6/ <0-128>/ <0-128>/ <0-128>●# permit ipv6/ <0-128>/ <0-128>/ <0-128> dscp <0-63>●# permit ipv6/ <0-128>/ <0-128>/ <0-128> dscp <0-63> shutdown●# permit ipv6/ <0-128>/ <0-128>/ <0-128> precedence <0-7>●# permit ipv6/ <0-128>/ <0-128>/ <0-128> precedence <0-7> shutdown●# permit ipv6/ <0-128>/ <0-128>/ <0-128> shutdown●# permit ipv6/ <0-128>/ <0-128> any dscp <0-63>●# permit ipv6/ <0-128>/ <0-128> any dscp <0-63> shutdown●# permit ipv6/ <0-128>/ <0-128> any precedence <0-7>●# permit ipv6/ <0-128>/ <0-128> any precedence <0-7> shutdown●# permit ipv6/ <0-128>/ <0-128> any shutdown●# permit ipv6 any/ <0-128> dscp <0-63> shutdown●# permit ipv6 any/ <0-128> dscp <0-63> shutdown●# permit ipv6 any/ <0-128> precedence <0-7>●# permit ipv6 any/ <0-128> precedence <0-7> shutdown●# permit ipv6 any/ <0-128> shutdown●# permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-63> shutdown●# permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-63> shutdown●# permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-63> shutdown●# permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-63> shutdown●# permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-63> shutdown●# permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-63> shutdown●# permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-63> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-63> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-63> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-63> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-63> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-63> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-63> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any dscp <0-63> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-63> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-63> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-63> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-63> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-63> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp < 0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-12 8> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shut down● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any dscp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any desp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any desp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any desp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any desp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any desp <0-128> shutdown● # permit ipv6 any any any desp <0-128> shutdown● @ permit ipv6 any any any desp <0-128> shutdown● @ permit ipv6 any any any desp <0-128> shutdown● @ permit ipv6 any any any desp <0-128> shutdown● @ permit ipv6 any any any desp <0-128> shutdown● @ permit ipv6 any any any desp <0-128> shutdown● @ permit ipv6 any any any desp < 0-128> shutdown● @ permit ipv6 any any any desp <0-128> shutdown● @ permit ipv6 any any any desp <0-128> shutdown● @ permit ipv6 any any any desp <0-128> shutdown● @ permit ipv6 any any any desp <0-128> shutdown● @ permit ipv6 any any any desp <0-128> shutdown● @ limiterviculans (or if the system is not available)

smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www> / <0-128> <0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data / hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www> dscp <0-63> shutdown

#deny tcp / <0-128> <0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data / hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www> / <0-128> <0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data / hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www> match-all dscp <0-63>

# permit tcp /<0-128><0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data / hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www>/<0-128><0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data / hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www> match-all dscp <0-63> shutdown

# permit tcp /<0-128><0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data / hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www>/<0-128><0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data / hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www> match-all precedence <0-7>

# permit tcp /<0-128><0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data / hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www>/<0-128><0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data / hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www> match-all precedence <0-7> shutdown

- # permit tcp /<0-128><0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data / hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www>/<0-128><0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data / hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www> match-all shutdown

# permit tcp /<0-128><0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data / hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www>/<0-128><0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data / hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www> precedence <0-7>

- # permit tcp /<0-128><0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data / hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www>/<0-128><0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data/

	hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www> precedence <0-7> shutdown●# permit tcp/ <0-128> <0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data / hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www>/<0-128> <0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / daytime / discard / domain / drip / echo / ftp / ftp-data / hostname / klogin / kshell / pop2 / pop3 / smtp / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / telnet / time / whois / www> shutdown●# permit udp/<0-128> <0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / bootpc / bootps / discard / domain / echo / nameserver / netbios-ns / ntp / rip / snmp / snmptrap / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / tftp / time / who>/<0-128> <0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / bootpc / bootps / discard / domain / echo / nameserver / netbios-ns / ntp / rip / snmp / snmptrap / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / tftp / time / who>●# permit udp/<0-128> <0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / bootpc / bootps / discard / domain / echo / nameserver / netbios-ns / ntp / rip / snmp / snmptrap / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / tftp / time / who><0-128> <0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / bootpc / bootps / discard / domain / echo / nameserver / netbios-ns / ntp / rip / snmp / snmptrap / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / tftp / time / who> dscp <0-63>●# permit udp/<0-128> <0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / bootpc / bootps / discard / domain / echo / nameserver / netbios-ns / ntp / rip / snmp / snmptrap / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / tftp / time / who><0-128> <0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / bootPC / bootps / discard / domain / echo / nameserver / netbios-ns / ntp / rip / snmp / snmptrap / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / tftp / time / who> dscp <0-63> shutdown●# permit udp/<0-128> <0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / bootpc / bootps / discard / domain / echo / nameserver / netbios-ns / ntp / rip / snmp / snmptrap / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / tftp / time / who><0-128> <0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / bootpc/ bootps / discard / domain / echo / nameserver / netbios-ns / ntp / rip / snmp / snmptrap / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / tftp / time / who> dscp <0-63> precedence <0-7>●# permit udp/<0-128> <0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / bootpc / bootps / discard / domain / echo / nameserver / netbios-ns / ntp / rip / snmp / snmptrap / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / tftp / time / who><0-128> <0-65535 / PORT_RANGE / any / bootp / bootps / discard / domain / echo / nameserver / netbios-ns / ntp / rip / snmp / snmptrap / sunrpc / syslog / tacacs-ds / talk / tftp / time / who> dscp <0-63> precedence <0-7> shutdown●# permit udp/<0-128> <0-65535 > any
	Use the “sequence” command to deny or permit the ACL. <1-2147483647> - Enter the sequence of ACL entry. The sequence represents the priority of the ACE in the ACL.Related Syntax:●#sequence <1-2147483647> deny●#sequence <1-2147483647> permit
	Use the “show acl” command to list current status of the selected ACL.
Ipv6 address	Use this command to modify the administration IPv6 address.address- Specify the IPv6 addresses. This IP is required when the administer wants to access into VigorSwitch through Telnet, SSH, HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP and so on.prefix <0-128> - Specify the prefix length of the IPv6 address.Related Syntax:#ipv6 addressprefix <0-128>
ipv6 autoconfig	Use this command to enable IPv6 auto configuration feature.
lpv6 default-gateway Use this	command to modify default gateway address.default-address- Specify the IPv6 addresses of the gateway.Related Syntax:#ipv6 default-gateway
ipv6 dhcp Use this command to	enable DHCPv6 client to get IP address from remote DHCPv6 server.Related Syntax:#ipv6 dhcp
ipv6 mld Use this command to	set MLD configuration.profile <1-128> - Use it to enter profile configuration.snooping - Use it to enable MLD snooping function.forward-method-Specify a method to forward the packets.report-suppression - Use it to enable MLD snooping report-suppression function.unknown-multicast action- Use it to set unknown multicast action.version <1/2> - Use it to change MLD support version.vlan <1-4094> - Use it to enable MLD on VLAN. Specify a VLAN ID for configuration.forbidden-port GigabitEthernet <1-10> - Specify a physical port.forbidden-port LAG <1-8> - Specify a LAG port.forbidden-router-port GigabitEthernet <1-10> - Use it to add static forbidden router port. Specify a physical port.forbidden-router-port LAG <1-8> - Use it to add static forbidden router port. Specify a LAG port.immediate-leave - Use it to enable fastleave function.last-member-query-count <1-7> - Use it to change how many query packets will send. Specify the last member query count. Default is 2.last-member-query-interval <1-25> - Use it to set interval between each query packet. Specify the last member query interval. Default is 1.query-interval <30-18000> - Use it to set interval between each query. Specify the query interval. Default is 125.response-time <5-20> - Use it to set response time. Specify a time value. Default is 10.robustness-variable <1-7> - Specify a robustness-variable value. Default is 2.router learn pim-dvmrp - Use it to enable learning router port by routing protocol packets (DVMRP).static-groupinterfaces gigabitethernet <1-10> - Use it to add a static group. Specify a physical port.static-group interfaces LAG <1-8> - Use it to add a static group. Specify a LAG port.static-port gigabitethernet <1-10>- Use it to add static forwarding port. Specify a physical port.static-port LAG <1-8>- Use it to add static forwarding port. Specify

a LAG port.

static-router-port Gigabitethernet <1-10> - Use it to add static router port. All query packets wil forward to the specified port. Specify a physical port.

static-router-port LAG <1-8> - Use it to add static router port. All query packets will forward to the specified port. Specify a LAG port.

Related Syntax:

• #ipv6 mld profile <1-128>
  # do
  # end
  # exit
  # profile range ipv6 action
  # profile range ipv6
  # profile range ipv6
  action
  # show
• #ipv6 mld snooping
  #ipv6 mld snooping forward-method
• #ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression
  #ipv6 mld snooping unknown-multicast action
• #ipv6 mld snooping version <1/2>
• #ipv6 mld snooping vlan <1-4094>
  #ipv6 mld snooping vlan <1-4094> forbidden-port Gigabitethernet <1-10>
  #ipv6 mld snooping vlan <1-4094> forbidden-port LAG <1-8>
• #ipv6 mld snooping vlan <1-4094> forbidden-router-port Gigabitethernet <1-12>
• #ipv6 mld snooping vlan <1-4094> forbidden-router-port LAG <1-8>
  #ipv6 mld snooping vlan <1-4094> immediate-leave
• #ipv6 mld snooping vlan <1-4094> last-member-query-count <1-7>
• #ipv6 mld snooping vlan <1-4094> last-member-query-interval <1-25>
  #ipv6 mld snooping vlan <1-4094> query-interval <30-18000>
  #ipv6 mld snooping vlan <1-4094> response-time <5-20>
  #ipv6 mld snooping vlan <1-4094> robustness-variable <1-7>
  #ipv6 mld snooping vlan <1-4094> router learn pim-dvmrp
  #ipv6 mld snooping vlan <1-4094> static-group interfaces gigabitethernet <1-10>
  #ipv6 mld snooping vlan <1-4094> static-group interfaces LAG <1-8>
  #ipv6 mld snooping vlan <1-4094> static-port gigabitethernet <1-10>
  #ipv6 mld snooping vlan <1-4094> static-port LAG <1-8>
  #ipv6 mld snooping vlan <1-4094> static-router-port Gigabitethernet <1-10>

#ipv6 mld snooping vlan <1-4094> static-router-port LAG <1-8>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan 33
P2100(config)# ipv6 acl CA_v6
P2100(config-ipv6-acl)# deny 3 00:50::32:ff/24 00:50::78:aa/32 

Telnet Command: jumbo-frame

Use this command to modify the maximum frame size of jumbo frame.

Syntax Items

jumbo-frame

Description

Syntax Items Description
jumbo-frame Enable the function of jumbo frame.

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# jumbo-frame 8000
P2100(config)# 

Use this command to set the system priority of the switch.

Syntax Items

Iacp

Iacp system-priority

Description

Syntax Items Description
lacp Enable the function.
lacp system-priority	It is used for selecting a master switch between two devices. Lower system priority has higher priority. The device with higher priority value can determine which port is able to join LAG.<1-65535> - Specify the system priority value.Related Syntax:# lacp# lacp system-priority <1-65535>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# lacp system-priority 1000
P2100(config)# 

Telnet Command: lag

LAG port can transmit packets to all ports for balancing the traffic loading. Use this command to change the load balance algorithm to src-dst-mac or src-dst-mac-ip as the Load Balance policy.

Syntax Items

lag load-balance

Description

Syntax Items Description
lag load-balance LAG load balancing is based on source and destination MAC address and/ or IP address.Related Syntax:# lag load-balance src-dst-mac# lag load-balance src-dst-mac-ip

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)# 

Tel net Comm and: line

Use this command to select line configuration mode.

Syntax Items

line console

line ssh

line telent

Description

Syntax Items Description
console/ssh/telnet	Select console configuration mode.To configure detailed settings, access into next level.#lineconsole - Select the console line to configure. Then, available sub-commands are:#do#exec-timeout#exit#history#no#password-thresh#silent-time
	Select SSH line to configure. Then, available sub-commands are:#do#end#exec-timeout#exit#password-thresh#silent-time
	telnet - Select telnet line to configure. Then, available sub-commands are:#do#end#exec-timeout#exit#password-thresh#silent-time
#do	Use the “do” command to run execution command in current mode.-Related Syntax:#do
#exec-timeout Use the “exec-timeout” to set the session timeout configuration.<0-65535>- Enter the number.Related Syntax:#exec-timeout <0-65535>
#exit	Use the “exit” command to close the current CLI session or return to the previous mode without saving the settings.Related Syntax:#exit
#history	Use the “history” command to specify the index number of history.<1-256>- Enter a number.Related Syntax:#history <1-256>
#no Use the “no” command to negate line command.Related Syntax:#no enable#no history#no login
#password-thresh Use the “password-thresh” command to set the login password intrusion threshold.<0-120>- Set a number of allowed password attempts. 0 means no threshold.Related Syntax:#password-thresh <0-120>
#silent-time Use the “silent-time” command to set fail silent time.<0-65535>- Set the time to disable the console response.Related Syntax:#silent-time <0-65535>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# line telnet
P2100(config-line)# 

Telnet Command: Ildp

Use this command to set LLDP function.

Syntax Items

Ildp

Ildp holdtime-multiplier

Ildp Ildpdu

Ildp med

lldp reinit-delay

Ildp tx-delay

Ildp tx-interval

Description

Syntax Items Description
Ildp Enable the function of LLDP.
Ildp holdtime-multiplier	Set the multiplier used for calculating the LLDP discovery packet hold time.<2-10> - Set the LLDP hold time multiplier.Related Syntax:# Ildp holdtime-multiplier <2-10>
Ildp IIdpdu bridging - The LLDP packets will be bridging when LLDP is disabledPeopleding - The LLDP packets will be filtered and deleted when LLDP is disabled.flooding - The LLDP packets will be flooded and forwarded to all interfaces when LLDP is disabled.Related Syntax:# Ildp IIdpdu bridging# Ildp IIdpdu filtering# Ildp IIdpdu flooding
Ildp med	med fast-start-repeat-count - Set the LLDP PDU fast start TX repeat count.med network-policy - Set the LLDP MED network policy table.med network-poicy voice auto - Enable the network policy voice auto mode.<1-10> - Set the fast start repeat count.<1-32> - Specify the index number of the policy.app-gust-voice/gust-voice-signaling/softphone-voice/streaming-video/video-conferencing/video-signaling/voice/voice-signaling>- Configure the application type for the policy.vlan <1-4094>- Specify the VLAN ID.vlan-type-set the VLAN tag status.priority <0-7>- Specify the L2 priority.dscp <0-63>- Specify the DSCP value.Related Syntax:# Ildp med fast-start-repeat-count <1-10>
	# lldp med network-policy <1-32> app< guest-voice/gust-voice-signaling / softphone-voice / streaming-video /video-conferencing / video-signaling / voice / voice-signaling>vlan <1-4094> vlan-typepriority <0-7>dscp<0-63># lldp med network-poicy voice auto
lldp rinit-delay Set the LLDP	re-initial delay to avoid LLDP generating too many PDU.<1-10>- Specify a number for LLDP server to initialize.Related Syntax:# lldp rinit-delay <1-10>
lldp tx-delay Set the delay time	between the successful LLDP frame transmissions.<1-8191>- Enter the number of delay time.Note that both tx-interval and tx-delay will affect the LLDP PDU TX time.Related Syntax:# lldp tx-delay <1-8191>
lldp tx-interval Set the LLDP	TX interval.<5-32767>- Enter the interval in unit of second.Related Syntax:# lldp tx-interval <5-32767>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# lldp med network-policy 30 app guest-voice vlan 30 vlan-type untag priority 3 dscp
P2100(config)# 

Tel net Command: logging

Use this command to set logging service on VigorSwitch.

Syntax Items

logging

logging buffered

logging console

logging file

logging host

Description

Syntax Items Description
logging Enable the logging service.
logging buffered Store the log message in the RAM.
logging console Specify the logging level.	<0-7> - Specify the logging level by entering a number (from EMEGR-DEBUG).Related Syntax:●# logging console●# logging console severity <0-7>
logging file Store the log message in the flash.<0-7> - Specify the logging level by entering a number (from EMEGR-DEBUG).Related Syntax:●# logging file severity <0-7>
logging host Define the logging server.host- Enter an IP address of the remote (or local) server.facility- Specify the facility parameter for the syslog message.port <1-65535>- Enter a number for the remote server. Default is 514.severity <0-7>- Specify the logging level by entering a number (from EMEGR-DEBUG).- Define a name as the host.Related Syntax:●#logging hostfacilityport <1-65535>●#logging hostport <1-65535>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-7>facility#logging hostseverity <0-7>facility#logging hostfacilityport <1-65535>●#logging hostport <1-65535>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-7>facility#logging hostseverity <0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-2>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-6>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-6>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-6>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-6>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-6>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-8>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-8>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-8>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-8>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-8>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-9>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-9>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-9>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-9>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-9>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-10>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-10>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-10>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-10>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-10>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>facility#logging hostport <1-65535>Severity<0-7>Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Severity<0-7>Facility#logging hostport <1-66000> Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Location#logging hostport <1-65535> Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Facility#logging hostport <1-65535> Facility#刊登宿台#logging hostport <1-65535> Facility#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿臺#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿之台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿至台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿二台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿四台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三四台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿七台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿三台#刊登宿一堂号：# # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # F#### # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # N## # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # %N## # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # %XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX 20%

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# logging host aa:00::la:FF facility local1 

Telnet Command: logmail

Use this command to configure log mail.

Syntax Items

logmail active

logmail auth

logmail category

logmail encpassword

logmail encry

logmail password

logmail port

logmail receiver

logmail sender

logmail server

logmail username

Description

Syntax Items Description
logmail active	- Enable or disable the function of log mail.Related Syntax:# logmail active
logmail auth	- Enable or disable the function of SMTP server authentication.Related Syntax:# logmail auth
logmail categoryAUTHMGR, CABLE_DIAG, DAI, DHCP_SNOOPING, GVRP, IGMP_SNOOPING, IPSG, L2, LLDP, Mac-based, Mirror, MLD_SNOOPING, Platform, PM, POE, Port, PORT_SECURITY, QoS, Rate, SNMP, STP, Security, System, Surveillance, Trunk, UDLD, VLAN, CLEAR> - Specify one type for the logmail.Related Syntax:# logmail categoryAUTHMGR, CABLE_DIAG, DAI, DHCP_SNOOPING, GVRP, IGMP_SNOOPING, IPSG, L2, LLDP, Mac-based, Mirror, MLD_SNOOPING, Platform, PM, POE, Port, PORT_SECURITY, QoS, Rate, SNMP, STP, Security, System, Surveillance, Trunk, UDLD, VLAN, CLEAR>
logmail encpassword Set SMTP encrypt authentication password.- Enter the password for SMTP server encrypt authentication.Related Syntax:# logmail encpassword
logmail encry	-Specify the encryption type for mail alert.Related Syntax:# logmail encry
logmail password	- Enter the password for SMTP server authentication.Related Syntax:# logmail password
logmail port	<0-65535>- Enter a port number.Related Syntax:# logmail port <0-65535>
logmail receiver	Specify an address for receiving the alart mail.- Enter the email address of the receiver.Related Syntax:# logmail receiver
logmail sender	Specify an address which sends out the alert mail.- Enter the email address of the sender.Related Syntax:# logmail
logmail server	Set the IP address of the server.- Enter the IP address of the SMTP server.Related Syntax:# logmail server
logmail username	Enter the username authenticated by STMP server.Related Syntax:# logmail username

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# logmail receiver [e-mail]
P2100(config)# 

Telnet Command: loop-protection

Use this command to set loop-protection.

Syntax Items

loop-protection action

loop-protection periodicTime

loop-protection state

Description

Syntax Items Description
loop-protection action Specify an action to be taken when the loop is happened.- Specify one action to be executed.Related Syntax:# loop-protection action
loop-protection periodicTime	Send the loop protection packets to the network hosts.<1-3>- Enter the number of the packet.Related Syntax:# Related Syntax:# loop-protection periodicTime <1-3>
loop-protection state	- Enable or disable the function of loop protection.Related Syntax:# loop-protection state

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# loop-protection state enable
P2100(config)# 

Use this command to create a MAC access list.

Syntax Items

mac acl

mac address-table

Description

Syntax Items Description
mac acl	- Set the name of the access list (ACL).To configure detailed settings, enter the name of ACL to access intonext level.#mac aclThen, available sub-commands are:#deny#do#end#exit#permit#sequence
	Use the “deny” command to add deny rules for the MAC access list:/Specify the source and destination MAC addresses and subnet masks.cos <0-7><0-7> - Set the cos value and the cos mask for a packet.<0x0600-0xFFFF> - Set the EtherType of the packet.Shutdown - Disable the Ethernet interface.vlan <1-4094> - Specify the VLAN ID of the packet.any - Any MAC address.Related Syntax:●#deny/cos <0-7><0-7>●#deny/cos <0-7><0-7> ethtype<0x0600-0xFFFF>●#deny/cos <0-7><0-7> ethtype<0x0600-0xFFFF> shutdown●#deny/cos <0-7><0-7> shutdown●#deny/cos <0-7><0-7>●#deny/cos <0-7><0-7> shutdown●#deny/cos <0-7><0-7> shutdown●#deny/cos <0-7><0-7> shutdown●#deny/cos <0-7><0-7> shutdown●#deny/cos <0-7><0-7> shutdown●#deny/cos <0-7><0-7> shutdown●#deny/cos <0-7><0-7> shutdown●#deny/cos <0-7></●#deny any any ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF> shutdown●#deny any any shutdown●#deny any any vlan <1-4094>●#deny any any vlan <1-4094> cos <0-7><0-7>●#deny any any vlan <1-4094> cos <0-7><0-7> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>●#deny any any vlan <1-4094> cos <0-7><0-7> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF> shutdown●#deny any any vlan <1-4094> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>●#deny any any vlan <1-4094> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF> shutdown●#deny any any vlan <1-4094> shutdown
	Use the "do" command to run execution command in current mode. -Related Syntax:●#do
	Use the "end" command to finish current mode. Any changes in current mode will be saved.Related Syntax:●#end
	Use the "exit" command to close the current CLI session or return to the previous mode without saving the settings.Related Syntax:●#exit
	Use the "no sequence" command to delete any entry in management ACL.<1-65535>- Specify an index number of the ACL.Related Syntax:●#no sequence <1-65535>
	Use the "permit" command to add permit rules which bypass the packets meet the rule./Specify the source and destination MAC addresses and subnet masks.cos <0-7><0-7>- Set the cos value and the cos mask for a packet.<0x0600-0xFFFF>- Set the EtherType of the packet.Shutdown - Disable the Ethernet interface.vlan <1-4094>- Specify the VLAN ID of the packet.any - Any MAC address.Related Syntax:●#permit/cos <0-7><0-7>●#permit/cos <0-7><0-7>ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>●#permit/●vlan <1-4094>●#permit/●vlan <1-4094>●#permit/●vlan <1-4094>●#permit/●vlan <1-4094>●#permit/●vlan <1-4094>●#permit/●vlan <1-4094>●#permit/●vlan <1-4094>●#permit/●vlan <1-4094>

cos <0-7><0-7>

#permit any /cos <0-7><0-7>ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>
#permit any /ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>
- #permit any /vlan <1-4094>
#permit any /vlan <1-4094> cos <0-7><0-7>
#permit any / vlan <1-4094> cos <0-7><0-7>ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>
#permit any /vlan <1-4094> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>

Use the "sequence" command to deny or permit the ACL.

<1-2147483647> - Enter the sequence index ACE. The sequence represents the priority of the ACE in the ACL.

/ Specify the source and destination MAC addresses and subnet masks.

cos <0-7><0-7> - Set the cos value and the cos mask for a packet.

<0x0600-0xFFFF> - Set the EtherType of the packet.

shutdown - Disable the Ethernet interface.

vlan <1-4094> - Specify the VLAN ID of the packet.

any - Any MAC address.

Related Syntax:

#sequence <1-2147483647>deny // cos <0-7><0-7>
#sequence <1-2147483647>deny // cos <0-7><0-7> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>
- #sequence <1-2147483647>deny < A:B:C:D:E:F>/// cos <0-7><0-7> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF> shutdown
- #sequence <1-2147483647>deny < A:B:C:D:E:F>/< A:B:C:D:E:F>/ cos <0-7><0-7> shutdown
#sequence <1-2147483647>deny // < A:B:C:D:E:F>/ < A:B:C:D:E:F>/ < A:B:C:D:E:F> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>
#sequence <1-2147483647>deny // ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF> shutdown
#sequence <1-2147483647>deny // shutdown
#sequence <1-2147483647>deny any // cos <0-7><0-7>
#sequence <1-2147483647>deny any // cos <0-7><0-7> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>
- #sequence <1-2147483647>deny any < A:B:C:D:E:F>/< A:B:C:D:E:F>/ cos <0-7><0-7> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF> shutdown
#sequence <1-2147483647>deny any /// cos <0-7><0-7> shutdown
#sequence <1-2147483647>deny any any cos <0-7><0-7>
#sequence <1-2147483647>deny any any cos <0-7><0-7> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>

• #sequence <1-2147483647>deny any any cos <0-7><0-7> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF> shutdown
• #sequence <1-2147483647>deny any any cos <0-7><0-7> shutdown
  #sequence <1-2147483647>deny any any ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>
  #sequence <1-2147483647>deny any any ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF> shutdown
• #sequence <1-2147483647>deny any any shutdown
  #sequence <1-2147483647>deny any any vlan <1-4094>
  #sequence <1-2147483647>deny any any vlan <1-4094> cos <0-7><0-7>
  #sequence <1-2147483647>deny any any vlan <1-4094> cos <0-7><0-7> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>
  #sequence <1-2147483647>deny any any vlan <1-4094> cos <0-7><0-7> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF> shutdown
  #sequence <1-2147483647>deny any any vlan <1-4094> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>
  #sequence <1-2147483647>deny any any vlan <1-4094> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF> shutdown
• #sequence <1-2147483647>deny any any vlan <1-4094> shutdown
• #sequence <1-2147483647>permit < A:B:C:D:E:F> / < A:B:C:D:E:F> < A:B:C:D:E:F> / < A:B:C:D:E:F> cos <0-7><0-7>
• #sequence <1-2147483647>permit < A:B:C:D:E:F>/< A:B:C:D:E:F> /< A:B:C:D:E:F> cos <0-7><0-7> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>
  #sequence <1-2147483647>permit // ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>
  #sequence <1-2147483647>permit // vlan <1-4094>
  #sequence <1-2147483647>permit // vlan <1-4094> cos <0-7><0-7>
  #sequence <1-2147483647>permit // vlan <1-4094> cos <0-7><0-7> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>
  #sequence <1-2147483647>permit // vlan <1-4094> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>
  #sequence <1-2147483647>permit any /cos <0-7><0-7>
  #sequence <1-2147483647>permit any /cos <0-7><0-7>ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>
  #sequence <1-2147483647>permit any /vlan <1-4094>
  #sequence <1-2147483647>permit any /vlan <1-4094>cos <0-7><0-7>
• #sequence <1-2147483647>permit any < A:B:C:D:E:F>/ vlan <1-4094> cos <0-7><0-7> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>
  #sequence <1-2147483647>permit any /vlan <1-4094>ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>
• #sequence <1-2147483647>permit any any cos <0-7><0-7>

	●#sequence <1-2147483647>permit any any cos <0-7><0-7> ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>●#sequence <1-2147483647>permit any any ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>●#sequence <1-2147483647>permit any any vlan <1-4094>●#sequence <1-2147483647>permit any any vlan <1-4094>cos <0-7><0-7>●#sequence <1-2147483647>permit any any vlan <1-4094>cos <0-7><0-7>ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>●#sequence <1-2147483647>permit any any vlan <1-4094>ethtype <0x0600-0xFFFF>
mac address-table Set the aging time for an entry remains in the MAC address table.

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)# mac acl test_CA
P2100(config-mac-acl)# deny 00:50:00:7f:12:11/00:00:00:00:10:20
00:50:00:aa:bb:cc/00:00:00:00:12:00 cos 3 2 ethtype 0x0600
P2100(config-mac-acl)# deny any 00:50:00:7f:12:11/00:00:00:00:10:20 cos 5 6
ethtype 0x0600
P2100(config-mac-acl)# deny any
P2100(config)# mac address-table static 00:50:07:12:ff:aa vlan 300 drop 

Tel net Command: mailalert

Use this command to configure mail alert for various conditions.

Syntax Items

mailalert active

mailalert auth

mailalert devicecheck

mailalert encpassword

mailalert encry

mailalert hwmon

mailalert interval

mailalert ipconflict

mailalert password

mailalert poestatus

mailalert port

mailalert portlink

mailalert portspeed

mailalert receiver

mailalert sender

mailalert server

mailalert sysrestart

mailalert throughputcheck

mailalert username

Description

Syntax Items Description
mailalert active	- Enable or disable the function of mail alert.Related Syntax:# mailalert active
mailalert auth	- Enable or disable the function of SMTP server authentication.Related Syntax:# mailalert auth
mailalert devicecheck	- Enable or disable the function of sending a mail alert when encountering a device check error.Related Syntax:# mailalert devicecheck
mailalert encpassword	- Set a encryption authentication password for the mail alert.Related Syntax:# mailalert encpassword PASSWORD
mailalert encry	- Specify the encryption type for mail alert.Related Syntax:# mailalert encry
mailalert hwmon Send a mail alert when hardware monitor error.- Enable or disable the function.Related Syntax:# mailalert hwmon
mailalert interval Set the transmission interval for the mail alert.<1-60>- Unit is second.Related Syntax:# mailalert interval <1-60>
mailalert ipconflict	- Enable or disable the function of sending a mail alert if encountering the IP conflict.Related Syntax:# mailalert ipconflict
mailalert password	- Enter the password for SMTP server authentication.Related Syntax:# mailalert password
mailalert poestatus	- Enable or disable the function of sending a mail alert when PoE status is changed.Related Syntax:# mailalert poestatus
mailalert port	- Enter a port number.Related Syntax:# mailalert port <0-65535>
mailalert portlink	- Enable or disable the function of sending an alert when the port link status changes.Related Syntax:# mailalert portlink
mailalert portspeed	- Enable or disable the function of sending an alert when the port link speed changes.Related Syntax:# mailalert portspeed
mailalert receiver Specify an address for receiving the alert mail.- Enter the email address of the receiver.Related Syntax:# mailalert receiver
mailalert sender Specify an address which sends out the alert mail.- Enter the email address of the sender.Related Syntax:# mailalert sender
mailalert server Set the IP address of the server.- Enter the IP address of the SMTP server.Related Syntax:# mailalert server
mailalert sysrestart	-Enable or disable the function of sending a mail alert when the system restarts.Related Syntax:# mailalert sysrestart
mailalert throughputcheck	- Enable or disable the function of sending a mail alert when reaching the throughput threshold.Related Syntax:# mailalert throughputcheck
mailalert username	- Enter the username authenticated by STMP server.Related Syntax:# mailalert username

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# mailalert receiver [e-mail] 

Telnet Command: management

Use this command to create a management access list and set configuration mode.

Syntax Items

management access-list management access-class

Description

Syntax Items Description
management access-list	- Enter the name of the access list.To configure detailed settings, enter the name of ACL to access into next level.#management access-listThen, available sub-commands are:#deny#do#end#exit#permit#sequence
	Use the “deny” command to add deny rules for the management access list:GigabitEthernet <1-10> - Specify a physical port.LAG <1-8> - Specify a LAG port.service- Specify the servcietype.ip-/ - Specify the source IP address with mask for the packets.ipv6-/ <0-128> - Specify the source IPv6 address and prefix length of the packet.Related Syntax:#deny interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-10>service#deny interfaces LAG <1-8> service#deny ip/interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-12> service#deny ip/interfaces LAG <1-8> service#deny ipv6/interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-10> service#deny ipv6/interfaces LAG <1-8> service
	Use the “do” command to run execution command in current mode.-Related Syntax:#do
	Use the “end” command to finish current mode. Any changes in current mode will be saved.Related Syntax:#end
	Use the “exit” command to close the current CLI session or return to the previous mode without saving the settings.Related Syntax:#exit
	Use the “no sequence” command to delete any entry in management ACL.<1-65535>- Specify an index number of the ACL.Related Syntax:#no sequence <1-65535>
	Use the “permit” command to add permit rules which bypass the packets meet the rule.GigabitEthernet <1-10> - Specify a physical port.LAG <1-8> - Specify a LAG port.

service - Specify the servcie type.

ip / - Specify the source IP address with mask for the packets.

ipv6 /<0-128> - Specify the source IPv6 address and prefix length of the packet.

Related Syntax:

• #permit interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-10> service
• #permit interfaces LAG <1-8> service
  #permit ip / interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-10> service
  #permit ip / interfaces LAG <1-8> service
  #permit ipv6 /<0-128> interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-10> service
• #permit ipv6 /<0-128> interfaces LAG <1-8> service

Use the "sequence" command to deny or permit the ACL.

<1-65535>- Specify an index number of the ACL.

GigabitEthernet <1-10> - Specify a physical port.

LAG <1-8> - Specify a LAG port.

service - Specify the servcie type.

ip / - Specify the source IP address with mask for the packets.

ipv6 /<0-128> - Specify the source IPv6 address and prefix length of the packet.

Related Syntax:

#sequence <1-65535>deny interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-12> service
- #sequence <1-65535>deny interfaces LAG <1-8>service
- #sequence <1-65535>deny ip /interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-10> service
- #sequence <1-65535>deny ip < A.B.C.D>/interfaces LAG <1-8> service
- #sequence <1-65535>deny ipv6 /<0-128> interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-10> service
- #sequence <1-65535>deny ipv6 /<0-128> interfaces LAG <1-8> service
- #sequence <1-65535> permit interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-10> service
#sequence <1-65535> permit interfaces LAG <1-8> service
- #sequence <1-65535> permit ip < A.B.C.D>/ interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-10> service
#sequence <1-65535> permit tip / interfaces LAG <1-8> service

	●#sequence <1-65535> permit ipv6/X:X::X:X>/<0-128> interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-10> service
	●#sequence <1-65535> permit/X:X::X:X>/<0-128> interfaces LAG <1-8> service
management access-class	Specify an ACL as active access-list.- Enter the name of the access list.Related Syntax:●# management access-class

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# management access-list CA_ACL
P2100(config-macl)# deny ip 192.168.2.56/255.255.255.0 interfaces gigabitethernet 3 service telnet
P2100(config-macl)#
P2100(config-macl)# deny ipv6 00:50::7f:3b/24 

Tel net Command: management-vlan

Use this command to set VLAN ID for management VLAN.

Syntax Items

management-vlan vlan

Description

Syntax Items Description
management-vlan vlan Set the management VLAN ID.	- Specify the VLAN ID number of management VLAN. Related Syntax:●# management-vlan vlan <1-4094>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# management-vlan vlan 200
VLAN 200: VLAN does not exist
P2100(config)# 

Tel net Command: mirror

Use this command to set the source / destination interface of a port mirror session.

Syntax Items

mirror session

Description

Syntax Items Description

mirror session

Set the destination interface of a port mirror session.<1-4> - Specify the mirror session ID number.GigabitEthernet <1-10> - Specify a physical port.allow-ingress - Enable the ingress traffic forwarding.- Specify the mirror direction, TX only, RX only or TX and RX.Related Syntax:# mirror session <1-4> destination interfaceGigabitEthernet <1-10> allow-ingress# mirror session <1-4> source interfacesGigabitEthernet <1-10>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# mirror session 3 destination interface GigabitEthernet 3 allow
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# mirror session 3 source interfaces LAG 3 both
P2100(config)# 

Use this command to enable MVR function and configure related settings.

Syntax Items

mvr

mvr group

mvr mode

mvr query-time

mvr vlan

Description

Syntax Items Description
mvr Enable MVR function.	Related Syntax:# mvr
mvr group Set MVR group address.- Enter an IP address.<1-128>- Specify a number for contiguous series of IPv4 multicast address.Related Syntax:# mvr group<1-128>
mvr mode Set MVR mode as compatible or dynamic.- The switch does not support IGMP dynamic joins on the source ports.- The switch supports MVR membership on the source ports.Related Syntax:# mvr mode
mvr query-time Set query response time for MVR.<1-10>- Specify the response time (second).Related Syntax:
	●# mvr query-time <1-10>
mvr vlan Set a VLAN ID for MVR.	<1-4094>- Specify the existed static VLAN ID.Related Syntax:●# mvr vlan <1-4094>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# mvr group 192.168.2.33
The operation will delete the MVR VLAN groups include static MVR groups.Continue
? [yes/no]:y
Input Parameter Error
P2100(config)# 

Tel net Command: no

Use this command to disable specific command.

Syntax Items

no

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# no port-security
P2100(config)# 

Tel net Command: openvpn

Use this command to enable/ disable the OpenVPN tunnel.

Syntax Items

openvpn enable

openvpn disable

openvpn filename

Description

Syntax Items Description
enable Enable the OpenVPN tunnel.
disable Disable the OpenVPN tunnel.
filename	- Define a name for OpenVPN configuration.Related Syntax:# openvpn filename

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)# openvpn enable 

killall: openvpn: no process killed
P2100(config)# 

Telnet Command: poe

Use this command configure settings for PoE device.

Syntax Items

poe mode

poe schedule

Description

Syntax Items Description
poe mode auto - VigorSwitch	determines the power watts for PoE device based on actual demand.manual - VigorSwitch will supply actual power demand for the PoE device and reserved PD class power for the PoE device none - VigorSwitch does not supply any power for the PoE device.Related Syntax:# poe mode auto# poe mode manual# poe mode none
poe schedule Specify a schedule	for PoE device.global-enable - index <1-24> - Specify the index number of the schedule profiles.Related Syntax:# poe schedule global-enable# poe schedule index <1-24>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# poe 

Telnet Command: port-security

Use this command to enable the function of port security.

Syntax Items

port-security

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# port-security
P2100(config)# 

Telnet Command: qos

Use this command to configure QoS settings.

Syntax Items

qos

qos map

qos queue

qos trust

Description

Syntax Items Description
qos Enable the quality of service based on basic trust type to assign the queue for packets.Related Syntax:# qos
qos map map cos-queue - Set the CoS to queue map.map dscp-queue - Set the DSCP to queue map.map precedence-queue - Set the IP Precedence to queue map.map queue-cos - Modify the queue to CoS map.map queue-dscp - Modify the queue to DSCP map.map queue-precedence - Modify the queue to IP precedence map.<1-8> - Specify the queue number for the following CoS values mapped.<1-8> - Specify the queue number to which the DSCP value shall correspond.<1-8> - Specify the queue number to which the IP precedence value shall correspond.<0-7> - Enter the cos value to which the queue ID shall correspond.<0-7> - Enter the DSCP value to which the queue ID shall correspond.<0-7> - Enter the IP precedence value to which the queue ID shall correspond.Related Syntax:# qos map cos-queue SEQUENCE to <1-8># qos map dscp-queue SEQUENCE to <1-8># qos map precedence-queue SEQUENCE to <1-8># qos map queue-cos SEQUENCE to <0-7># qos map queue-dscp SEQUENCE to <0-7># qos map queue-precedence SEQUENCE to <0-7>
qos queue queue strict-priority-num - Set the number of strict priority queue.queue weight SEQUENCE - Set the number of non-strict priority queue.<0-8> - Specify the queue number.<weight1-weight8> <1-127> - Specify a number (1~127)representing queue weight value.Related Syntax:# qos queue strict-priority-num <0-8># qos queue weight SEQUENCE<1-127>
qos trust	Set the trust type, cos, for the device to judge the appropriate queue of the packets.Related Syntax:●# qos trust

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# qos map cos-queue SEQUENCE to 3
P2100(config)# 

Tel net Command: radius

Use this command to configure settings for RADIUS server.

Syntax Items

radius default-config

radius host

Description

Syntax Items Description
radius default-config	Key- Specify key string for RADIUS server. Retransmit <1-10>- Specify the retransmit times (from 1 to 10) for RADIUS server. Timeout <1-30>- Specify the time out value (from 1 to 30) for RADIUS server.Related Syntax:# radius default-config key# radius default-config keyretransmit <1-10)# radius default-config keyretransmit <1-10>timeout <1-30)# radius default-config retransmit <1-10)# radius default-config retransmit <1-10>timeout <1-30)# radius default-config timeout <1-30>
radius host host-Specify a domain name or IP address for RADIUS server host.auth-port <0~65535>- Specify a UDP port number for RADIUS server.key-Specify key string for RADIUS server.priority <0~65535>- Specify the priority for RADIUS server.retransmit <1-10>- Specify the retransmit times (from 1 to 10) for RADIUS server.timeout <1-30>- Specify the time out value (from 1 to 30) for RADIUS server.type <802.1x / all / login>- Choose the usage type for 802.1X authentication, or login, or both 802.1X authentication and login of RADIUS type.Related Syntax:# radius hostauth-port <0~65535)# radius hostauth-port <0~65535>key# radius hostauth-port <0~65535>key# radius hostauth-port <0~65535>key# radius hostauth-port <0~65535>key# radius hostauth-port <0~65535>key# radius hostauth-port <0~65535>key# radius hostauth-port <0~65535>key# radius hostauth-port <0~6565555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555	- Specify a domain name or IP address for RADIUS server host.auth-port <0~65535>- Specify a UDP port number for RADIUS server.key-Specify key string for RADIUS server.priority <0~65535>- Specify the priority for RADIUS server.retransmit <1-10>- Specify the retransmit times (from 1 to 10) for RADIUS server.timeout <1-30>- Specify the time out value from 1 to 30) for RADIUS server.type <802.1x / all / login>- Choose the usage type for 802.1X authentication, or login, or both 802.1X authentication and login of RADIUS type.Related Syntax:# radius hostauth-port <0~65535)# radius hostauth-port <0~65535>key# radius hostauth-port <0~655555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555●# radius hostkey●# radius hostkeypriority<0~65535>●# radius hostkeypriority<0~65535>retransmit <1-10>●# radius hostkeypriority<0~65535>retransmit <1-10>timeout <1-30>●# radius hostkeypriority<0~65535>retransmit <1-10>timeout <1-30>type <802.1x/all / login>●# radius hostpriority <0~65535>●# radius hostpriority <0~65535>retransmit <1-10>●# radius hostpriority <0~65535>retransmit <1-10>timeout <1-30>●# radius hostpriority <0~65535>retransmit <1-10>timeout <1-30>●# radius hosttype <802.1x / all / login>●# radius hosttimeout <1-30>●# radius hosttimeout <1-30>●# radius hosttimeout <1-30>●# radius hosttimeout <1-30>●# radius hosttimeout <1-30>●# radius hosttimeout <1-30>●# radius hosttimeout <1-30>●# radius hosttimeout <1-30>●# radius hosttimeout <1-30>●# radius hosttimeout <1-30 >●# radius hosttimeout <1-30>●# radius hosttimeout <1-30>●# radius hosttimeout <1-30>●# radius hosttimeout <1-30>●# radius hosttimeout <1-30>●# radius hosttimeout <1-30>●# radius hosttimeout <1-30>●# radius hosttimeout <1-30>●# radius hosttimeout <1-30>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# radius default-config key 123456789 retransmit 3 timeout 10
P2100(config)# radius host radius auth-port 3000

Tel net Command: schedule

Use this command to set schedule.

Syntax Items

schedule index

Description

Syntax Items Description
schedule index	Specify an index number for configuring detailed settings of a schedule profile.<1-15> - Enter a number to select a schedule profile.- Give a brief description for such profile.cycle-days - The action applied with the schedule will take place every few days.monthly-date - The action applied with the schedule will take place in specified day within a month.once - The action applied with the schedule will take place for one time.weekdays - The action applied with the schedule will take place on a certain day within a week.<1-31> - Enter a number to make action repeat.- Represent month of April, August, December, February, January, July, June, March, May, November, October, and
	September.- Represent Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday.<1-31>- Enter a number as the start date within a month.<2000-2035>- Enter the number as the year of start date.- Enter the hours and the minutes.- Enable (on) or disable (off) the action applied with such profile.Related Syntax:# schedule index <1-15> description# schedule index <1-15> how-often cycle-days <1-31> start-date<apr / aug / dec / feb / jan / jul / jun / mar / may / nov / oct / sep > <1-31> <2000-2035> start-timedurationaction# schedule index <1-15> how-often monthly-date <1-31> start-date<apr / aug / dec / feb / jan / jul / jun / mar / may / nov / oct / sep > <1-31> <2000-2035> start-timedurationaction# schedule index <1-15> how-often once start-date<apr / aug / dec / feb / jan / jul / jun / mar / may / nov / oct / sep > <1-31> <2000-2035> start-timedurationaction# schedule index <1-15> how-often weekdayssun / mon / tue / wed / thu / fri / sat> start-date<apr / aug / dec / feb / jan / jul / jun / mar / may / nov / oct / sep > <1-31> <2000-2035> start-timedurationaction

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# schedule index 1 how-often cycle-days 3 start-date jan 1 2019
start-time 08:01 duraton 17:30 action on
P2100(config)# schedule index 2 how-often weekdays sun start-date may 11 2019
start-time 02:10 duration 12:10 action on
P2100(config)# 

Use this command to define SNMP community.

Syntax Items

snmp community

snmp engineid

snmp group

snmp host

snmp trap

snmp user

snmp view

Description

Syntax Items Description
snmp community snmp community	- Set community name for SNMP v1 and v2, and access group name.Available parameters for SNMP community:after community - Enter a string (maximum length: 20 characters) as community name.after group - Enter a string (maximum length: 30 characters) as access group.ro - Set the community as read only.rw - Set the community as read and write.Related Syntax:# snmp communitygroupro# snmp communityrwxewro# snmp community viewrw
snmp engineid snmp engineid	- Set the remote host for SNMP engine.default - Reset to default setting of engine ID for SNMP server.- Such number must be 10 ~ 64 hexadecimal.- Enter the IP address of the remote SNMP server.- Enter the host name of the remote SNMP server.- Enter the IPv6 address for remote SNMP server.Related Syntax:# snmp engineid# snmp engineid default# snmp engineid remote# snmp engineid remote# snmp engineid remote
snmp group snmp group - Set	the SNMP group.- Specify the name of SNMP group.version <1/2c/3>- Specify the version of SNMP service.- Specify the packet authentication mode.“auth” means to perform packet authentication without encryption. It is applicable for SNMPv3 only. “noauth” means no packet authentication performed. “priv” means to perform packet authentication with encryption and also it is applicable for SNMPv3 only.read-view- Set the view name to enable agent configuration.notify-view- Set the view name to send only trap included in SNMP view for notification.write-view- Set the view name to enable viewing.Related Syntax:# snmp groupversion <1/2c/3>read-view# snmp groupversion <1/2c/3>read-viewnotify-view# snmp groupversion <1/2c/3>read-viewnotify-viewwrite-view
snmp host snmp host - Set a host to receive SNMP notifications.- Enter the IPv4/IPv6 address or host name of the receipt.version <1/2c/3>- Specify the version of SNMP service.- Set the community name sent with the notification.udp-port <1-65535>- Set the UDP port number.timeout <1-300>- Set the timeout of V2c informs.retries <1-255>- Enter the retry counter of V2c informs.Related Syntax:

Set a host to receive SNMP notifications.

# snmp host retries <1-255>

# snmp host timeout <1-300> retries <1-255>

# snmp host udp-port <1-65535> retries <1-255>

# snmp host udp-port <1-65535> timeout <1-300>

Set a host to receive SNMP notifications. Notification type is informs.

# snmp host informs retries <1-255>

# snmp host informs timeout <1-300>

<config)# snmp host informs timeout <1-300> retries <1-255>

# snmp host informs udp-port <1-65535>

# snmp host informs udp-port <1-65535> retries <1-255>

# snmp host informs udp-port <1-65535> timeout <1-300>

# snmp host informs udp-port <1-65535> timeout <1-300> retries <1-255>

# snmp host informs version <1/2c/3>

# snmp host informs version <1/2c/3> retries <1-255>

# snmp host informs version <1/2c/3> timeout <1-300>

# snmp host informs version <1/2c/3> timeout <1-300> retries <1-255>

# snmp host informs version <1/2c/3> udp-port <1-65535>

# snmp host informs version <1/2c/3> udp-port <1-65535> retries <1-255>

# snmp host informs version <1/2c/3> udp-port <1-65535> timeout <1-300>

- # snmp host informs version <1/2c/3> udp-port <1-65535> timeout <1-300> retries <1-255>

Set a host to receive SNMP notifications. Notification type is traps.

# snmp host traps

# snmp host traps retries <1-255>

# snmp host traps timeout <1-300>

# snmp host traps timeout <1-300> retries <1-255>

# snmp host traps version <1/2c/3> retries <1-255>

# snmp host traps version <1/2c/3> timeout <1-300> retries <1-255>

# snmp host traps version <1/2c/3> udp-port <1-65535>

# snmp host traps version <1/2c/3> udp-port <1-65535> retries <1-255>

# snmp host traps version <1/2c/3> udp-port <1-65535> timeout <1-300>

- # snmp host traps version <1/2c/3> udp-port <1-65535> timeout <1-300> retries <1-255>

	# snmp hostversion <1/2c/3>retries <1-255># snmp hostversion <1/2c/3>timeout <1-300># snmp hostversion <1/2c/3>timeout <1-300>retries <1-255># snmp hostversion <1/2c/3><NAME>udp-port <1-65535># snmp hostversion <1/2c/3><NAME>udp-port <1-65535>retries <1-255># snmp hostversion <1/2c/3><NAME>udp-port <1-65535>timeout <1-300># snmp hostversion <1/2c/3><NAME>udp-port <1-65535>timeout <1-300>retries <1-255>
	# snmp host HOSTNAME# snmp host HOSTNAMEretries <1-255># snmp host HOSTNAMEtimeout <1-300># snmp host HOSTNAMEtimeout <1-300>retries <1-255># snmp host HOSTNAMEudp-port <1-65535># snmp host HOSTNAMEudp-port <1-65535>retries <1-255># snmp host HOSTNAMEudp-port <1-65535>timeout <1-300># snmp host HOSTNAMEudp-port <1-65535>timeout <1-300>retries <1-255>
	# snmp host HOSTNAME informs# snmp host HOSTNAME informsretries <1-255># snmp host HOSTNAME informstimeout <1-300># snmp host HOSTNAME informsretries <1-255>timeout <1-300>retries <1-255># snmp host HOSTNAME informsudp-port <1-65535># snmp host HOSTNAME informsudp-port <1-65535>retries <1-255># snmp host HOSTNAME informsudp-port <1-65535>timeout <1-300># snmp host HOSTNAME informsudp-port <1-65535>timeout <1-300>retries <1-255>
	# snmp host HOSTNAME traps# snmp host HOSTNAME trapsretries <1-255># snmp host HOSTNAME trapstimeout <1-300># snmp host HOSTNAME trapstimeout <1-300>retries <1-255># snmp host HOSTNAME trapsudp-port <1-65535>retries <1-255># snmp host HOSTNAME trapstimeout <1-300># snmp host HOSTNAME traps<1/2c/3><NAME>retries <1-255># snmp host HOSTNAME traps version <1/2c/3><NAME>timeout <1-300># snmp host HOSTNAME traps version <1/2c/3>

	timeout <1-300> retries <1-255>
●	# snmp host HOSTNAME traps version <1/ 2c/ 3><NAME> udp-port <1-65535>
●	# snmp host HOSTNAME traps version <1/ 2c/ 3><NAME> udp-port <1-65535> retries <1-255>
●	# snmp host HOSTNAME traps version <1/ 2c/ 3><NAME> udp-port <1-65535> timeout <1-300>
●	# snmp host HOSTNAME traps version <1/ 2c/ 3><NAME> udp-port <1-65535> timeout <1-300> retries <1-255>
●	# snmp host HOSTNAME version <1/ 2c/ 3><NAME>
●	# snmp host HOSTNAME version <1/ 2c/ 3><NAME>
●	# snmp host HOSTNAME version <1/ 2c/ 3><NAME>
●	timeout <1-300>
●	# snmp host HOSTNAME version <1/ 2c/ 3><NAME>
●	timeout <1-300> retries <1-255>
●	# snmp host HOSTNAME version <1/ 2c/ 3><NAME>
●	udp-port <1-65535>
●	# snmp host HOSTNAME version <1/ 2c/ 3><NAME>
●	udp-port <1-65535> retries <1-255>
●	# snmp host HOSTNAME version <1/ 2c/ 3><NAME>
●	timeout <1-300>
●	# snmp host HOSTNAME version <1/ 2c/ 3><NAME>
●	timeout <1-300> retries <1-255>
●	timeout <1-300>
●	# snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host # snmp host

	<1-65535>retries <1-255># snmp hosttrapsudp-port<1-65535>timeout <1-300># snmp hosttrapsudp-port<1-65535>timeout <1-300>retries <1-255># snmp hostversion <1/2c/3># snmp hostversion <1/2c/3>retries <1-255># snmp hostversion <1/2c/3>timeout <1-300># snmp hostversion <1/2c/3>timeout <1-300>retries <1-255># snmp hostversion <1/2c/3>udp-port <1-65535># snmp hostversion <1/2c/3>udp-port <1-65535>retries <1-255># snmp hostversion <1/2c/3>udp-port <1-65535>timeout <1-300># snmp hostversion <1/2c/3>udp-port <1-65535>timeout <1-300>retries <1-255>
snmp trap snmp trap - Send the SNMP traps.auth - Enable the SNMP authentication failure trap.cold-start - Enable the SNMP cold startup failure trap.linkUpDown - Enable the SNMP link up and down failure trap.wort-security - Enable the SNMP port security trap.Warm-start - Enable the SNMP warm startup failure trap.Related Syntax:# snmp trap/port-security / warm-start>
snmp user snmp user - Set SNMP user account.- Specify a name of SNMP user.- Sepcify a name of SNMP group.auth - Specify the authentication mode, md5 or sha.- Enter the password for the md5/ sha mode.Pri - Enter a password as a privacy key.Related Syntax:# snmp user# snmp userauth# snmp userauthpriv	SNMP user account.- Specify a name of SNMP user.- Sepcify a name of SNMP group.auth - Specify the authentication mode, md5 or sha.- Enter the password for the md5/ sha mode.Pri - Enter a password as a privacy key.Related Syntax:# snmp user# snmp userauth# snmp userauthpriv
snmp view	snmp view - Set the SNMP view.- Enter the SNMP view name.Subtree - Specify the ASN.1 subtree object identifier (OID).oid-mask - Specify the OID mask, or use all for all masks.viewtype - Let the selected MIBs include or exclude in the SNMP view.Related Syntax:# snmp view subtreeoid-maskviewtype

Example

P2100# configure

P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# snmp engineid remote 192.168.2.38 00036D001188
P2100(config)# snmp engineid remote 00:50::16:88 00036D002288
P2100(config)# snmp host 192.168.2.89 CAR_community udp-port 1500 timeout 200
P2100(config)# snmp host 192.168.2.88 informs version 2c CAR_community
udp-port 3000 timeout 180 retries 35
P2100(config)# snmp host 192.168.2.88 traps version 2c CAR_traps udp-port 6500
timeout 60 retries 2
P2100(config)# snmp host 192.168.2.88 version 2c CAR_version udp-port 3000
timeout 60 retries 2
P2100(config)# snmp host HOSTNAME CAR_host udp-port 3000 timeout 60 retries
P2100(config)# snmp host HOSTNAME informs HA_informs udp-port 3000 timeout 60
retries 2
P2100(config)# snmp host HOSTNAME version 2c HT_version udp-port 3000 timeout
60 retries 2
P2100(config)# snmp user CA_user_1 CA_group_1 auth md5 CA12345678 priv
PR12345678
P2100(config)# snmp view CAR_community subtree 10 oid-mask 9 viewtype included
P2100(config)# 

Telnet Command: sntp

Use this command to configure settings for remote SNTP server.

Syntax Items

sntp host

Description

Syntax Items Description
sntp host	Set the remote SNTP server by specifying IP address or hostname.- Enter the IP address or hostname of SNTP server.<1-65535>- Specify the port number for the SNTP server.Related Syntax:# sntp host# sntp hostport <1-65535>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# sntp host KEY1245 port 3000
P2100(config)# 

Telnet Command: spanning-tree

Use this command to configure settings for spanning-tree.

Syntax Items

spanning-tree

spanning-tree bpdu

spanning-tree forward-delay

spanning-tree hello-time

spanning-tree max-hops

spanning-tree maximum-age

spanning-tree mode

spanning-tree mst

spanning-tree pathcost

spanning-tree priority

spanning-tree tx-hold-count

Description

Syntax Items Description
spanning-tree Enable the function of spanning-tree.Related Syntax:# spanning-tree
spanning-tree bpdu Filter/flood the BPDU packets.- Packets will be filtered when STP is disabled on specified interface.- Packets will be flooded to all interfaces with STP disabled and flooding mode.Related Syntax:# spanning-tree bpdu
spanning-tree forward-delay Set the STP forward delay time.<4-30>- Default value is 15 (seconds).Related Syntax:# spanning-tree forward-delay <4-30>
spanning-tree hello-time Set the hello time interval to broadcast the message to other bridges.<1-10>- Default value is 2 (seconds).Related Syntax:# spanning-tree hello-time <1-10>
spanning-tree max-hops Set the number of hops for BPDI packets to be forwarded in the MSTP region.<1-40>- Default value is 20 (seconds).Related Syntax:# spanning-tree max-hops <1-40>
spanning-tree maximum-age Set the time interval for VigorSwitch to wait without receiving the configuration message.<6-40>- Default value is 20 (seconds).Related Syntax:# spanning-tree maximum-age <6-40>
spanning-tree mode - Specify the operation mode for spanning tree, such as multiple spanning tree (MSTP), rapid spanning tree (RSTP) or spanning tree (STP).Related Syntax:# spanning-tree mode
spanning-tree mst spanning-tree mst - Configure port priority settings for MST.<0-15>- Specify the instance ID.<0-61440>- Set the priority for the specified instance ID.Related Syntax:# spanning-tree mst <0-15>priority <0-61440>
	spanning-tree mst configuration - Access into the MSTP configuration mode. To configure detailed settings, access into next level.# spanning-tree mst configuration# Then, available sub-commands are:#do# end# exit# instance# name# no# revision do - Enter the action to be performed.end - End current mode.exit - Exit from current mode.instance <0-15> vlan <1-4094> - Specify the instance ID number and VLAN ID number.name - Set a name of MST configuration.no - Set to default setting.revision <0-65535> - Set revision level.
spanning-tree pathcost Set the path-cost method for spanning tree.- Long means the path cost ranging from 1 to 200000000; short means the path cost ranging from 1 to 65535.Related Syntax:# spanning-tree pathcost method
spanning-tree priority Set the priority for the specified instance ID.<0-61440> - The number must be multiple of 4096.Related Syntax:# spanning-tree priority <0-61440>
spanning-tree tx-hold-count	Set the maximum number of packets transmission per second.<1-10> - Valid range is from 1 to 10.Related Syntax:# spanning-tree tx-hold-count <1-10>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# spanning-tree forward-delay 20
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# spanning-tree maximum-age 38
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# spanning-tree tx-hold-count 3
P2100(config)# 

Tel net Command: start-up

Use this command to restart ICP status after rebooting VigorSwitch.

Syntax Items

start-up icp

Description

Syntax Items Description
start-up icp	Related Syntax:# start-up icp enable

Example

P2100# configure

P2100(config)#

P2100(config)# start-up icp enable

P2100(config)#

Telnet Command: storm-control

Use this command to configure settings for Storm Control.

Syntax Items

storm-control ifg exclude

storm-control ifg include

storm-control unit bps

storm-control unit pps

Description

Syntax Items Description
storm-control ifg exclude Exclude	Include the preamble and IFG (inter frame gap) into the calculating.Related Syntax:# storm-control ifg exclude
storm-control ifg include	Include the preamble and IFG (inter frame gap) into the calculating.Related Syntax:# storm-control ifg include
storm-control unit bps Change	the unit of calculating method for storm-control.bps - Calculate the storm control rate by octet-based.Related Syntax:# storm-control unit bps
storm-control unit pps Change	the unit of calculating method for storm-control.pps - Calculate the storm control rate by packet-based.Related Syntax:# storm-control unit pps

Example

P2100# configure

P2100(config)#

P2100(config)# storm-control ifg exclude

P2100(config)#

P2100(config)# storm-control unit bps

P2100(config)#

Telnet Command: surveillance-vlan

Use this command to configure settings for surveillance-VLAN.

Syntax Items

surveillance-vlan

surveillance-vlan aging-time

surveillance-vlan cos

Use this command to modify the contact information of VigorSwitch.

Syntax Items

system contact

system location

system name

Description

Syntax Items Description
system contact	- Enter a string (maximum length: 256 characters).Related Syntax:# system contact
system location	- Specify the location of the host.Related Syntax:# system location
system name	- Change the name of the system. The default name is “P2100”.Related Syntax:# system name

Example

P2100# configure

P2100(config)#

P2100(config)# system contact callMIS

P2100(config)#

P2100(config)# system location DrayTek

P2100(config)# system name UPDATEFRIM

UPDATEFRIM(config)#

Telnet Command: tacacs

Use this command to configure TACACS+ server.

Syntax Items

tacacs default-config

tacacs host

Description

Syntax Items Description
tacacs default-config Set the	default parameters for the TACACS+ server.Modify the default parameters of server key and timeout setting for the TACACS+ server.- Enter a string as the TACACS+ server key.<1-30>- Enter a value as the TACACS+ server timeout.Related Syntax:# tacacs default-config# tacacs default-config keytimeout<1-30>
tacacs host Set host name for	the TACACS+ server or set host name, server key and priority for the TACACS+ server.- Enter the host name of the TACACS+ server.- Enter a string as the TACACS+ server key.<0-65535>- Enter a value as server priority in server group.<1-30>- Enter a timeout setting.Related Syntax:# tacacs hostkey# tacacs hostkeypriority <0-65535)# tacacs hostkeytimeout <1-30>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# tacacs default-config key tce00056 timeout 25
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# tacacs host carrie02 key TA012345 priority 3000 timeout 10
P2100(config)# 

Telnet Command: tr069

Use this command to configure parameter settings of TR-069.

Syntax Items

tr069 acsPwd
tr069 acsUsername
tr069 acsurl
tr069 cpeEnable
tr069 cpePwd
tr069 cpeUsername
tr069 cpeport
tr069 healthlinkstatus
tr069 healthpoewarning
tr069 healthspeedstatus
tr069 periodicInfo
tr069 periodicTime Time
tr069 ssl
tr069 stun
tr069 stunMAXkeepalive
tr069 stunMINkeepalive
tr069 stunaddr
tr069 stunport
tr069 tls 

Description

Syntax Items Description
tr069 acsPwd	- Enter the password used for registering to VigorACS server.Related Syntax:●# tr069 acsPwd
tr069 acsUsername	- Enter the username used for registering to VigorACS server.Related Syntax:●# tr069 acsUsername
tr069 acsurl- Enter the URL for VigorACS server.Related Syntax:●# tr069 acsurl
tr069 cpeEnable	- Enter Enable for VigorACS controlling such CPE through the Internet.Related Syntax:●# tr069 cpeEnable
tr069 cpePwd	- Enter the password that VigorACS server can use it to authenticate and control the CPE device.Related Syntax:●# tr069 cpePwd
tr069 cpeUsername	- Enter the username that VigorACS server can use it to authenticate and control the CPE device.Related Syntax:●# tr069 cpeUsername
tr069 cpeport <0-65535>- Enter the port number for CPE.Related Syntax:●# tr069 cpeport <0-65535>
tr069 healthlinkstatus	Perform the health check for the link status of specified interface(s).- Specify the interface, such as GE1, GE3-GE5 and so on.Related Syntax:●# tr069 healthlinkstatus
tr069 healthpoewarning Perform the health check for PoE port warning status.- Specify the interface, such as GE1, GE3-GE5 and so on.Related Syntax:●# tr069 healthpoewarning
tr069 healthspeedstatus	Perform the health check for link speed status of specified interface(s).- Specify the interface, such as GE1, GE3-GE5 and so on.Related Syntax:●# tr069 healthspeedstatus
tr069 periodicInfo	- Enter Enable to activate periodic information setting.Related Syntax:●# tr069 periodicInfo
tr069 periodicTime TIME Update the CPE information to VigorACS server.
	Related Syntax:●# tr069 periodicTime TIME
tr069 ssl	<disable/ enable>- Enter Enable to enable CPE management protocol with SSL.Related Syntax:●# tr069 ssl
tr069 stun	<disable/ enable>- Enter Enable to enable CPE management protocol with STUN server.Related Syntax:●# tr069 stun
tr069 stunMAXkeepalive	Set the maximum time period for CPE to send the binding request to VigorACS server.<0-65535>- Enter a number.Related Syntax:●# tr069 stunMAXkeepalive <0-65535>
tr069 stunMINkeepalive	Set the minimum time period for CPE to send the binding request to VigorACS server.<0-65535>- Enter a number.Related Syntax:●# tr069 stunMINkeepalive <0-65535>
tr069 stunaddr	- Enter the URL/IP address of STUN server.Related Syntax:●# tr069 stunaddr
tr069 stunport <0-65535>- Set	Set the port number for STUN server.Related Syntax:●# tr069 stunport <0-65535>
tr069 tls- Set	the TLS version (2 or 3) for VigorSwitch.Related Syntax:●# tr069 tls version

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# tr069 stunaddr 192.168.3.99
P2100(config)# 

Telnet Command: udld

Use this command to set the time interval of UniDirectional Link Detection (UDLD) sent message.

Syntax Items

udld

Description

Syntax Items Description
udld message time	<1-90> - Specify a time interval (unit: second) for sending message.Related Syntax:#udld message time <1-90>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)# udd message time 35
P2100(config)# 

Tel net Command: username

Use this command to add a new user account or edit an existing user account.

Syntax Items

username

Description

Syntax Items Description

username

privilege - Set a user account with the privilege of admin, user or customized level.secret - Set a user account with unencrypted password.secret encrypted - Set a user account with encrypted password.- Enter the name (0~32 characters) of the local user profile.- Specify the privilege level to be admin (privilege 15) / user (privilege 1).- Enter a string as the password for the local user.Related Syntax:# usernameprivilegesecret# usernamesecret# username secret encrypted

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# username carrie_1 privilege admin secret md123456
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# username carrie_1 secret encrypted ca123456
Old password: *****
P2100(config)# 

Use this command to configure detailed settings for VLAN profile.

Before configuring, you have to access into next phase. See the following example:

P2100# configure
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# vlan 3
P2100(config-vlan)# 

Syntax Items

vlan vlan-list

vlan mac-vlan group

vlan protocol-vlan group

Description

Syntax Items Description
vlan	Specify the index number of VLAN profile. To configure detailed settings, access into next level.- The available range is 1 to 4094.# vlan 33# Then, available sub-commands are:#do#end#exit#name
	Use the “do” command to run execution command in current mode.-Related Syntax:#do
	Use the “end” command to finish current mode. Any changes in current mode will be saved.Related Syntax:#end
	Use the “exit” command to close the current CLI session or return to the previous mode without saving the settings.Related Syntax:#exit
	Use the “name” command to add a VLAN profile.- Enter the name of the VLAN profile.Related Syntax:#name
vlan mac-vlan group Create	MAC-vlan group.<1-2147483647>- Specify a group ID.- Enter the MAC address to be mapped.<9-48>- Enter a number representing the subnet mask.Related Syntax:#mask <9-48>
vlan protocol-vlan group Create	a protocol VLAN group with specified protocol type and value.<1-8>- Enter a number to specify a VLAN group.- Specify a frame type by entering Ethernet_ii, 11c_other or snap_1042.- Enter a value (0x0600~0xFFFE).Related Syntax:#vlan protocol-vlan group <1-8>frame-typeprotocol-value

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)# vlan 3
P2100(config-vlan)#
P2100(config-vlan)# name vlan_friends
P2100(config-vlan)#
...
P2100(config)# vlan mac-vlan group 33 00:50:17:22:12:ff mask 10
P2100(config)# vlan group 1 frame-type ethernet_ii protocol-value 0x0600
P2100(config)# 

Tel net Command: voice-vlan

Use this command to enable voice VLAN and configure settings for voice VLAN.

Syntax Items

voice-vlan aging-time

voice-vlan cos

voice-vlan oui-table

voice-vlan vlan

Description

Syntax Items Description
voice-vlan aging-time Set the voice VLAN aging timeout interval.<30-65536> - The unit is minute. Default is 1440 (minutes).- Enter the name of the VLAN profile.Related Syntax:# voice-vlan aging-time <30-65536>
voice-vlan cos Set the voice VLAN cos value and remark function.Specify the class of service for voice VLAN.<0-7> - CoS value. Default is 6. Remark is disabled.remark - L2 user priority is remarked with the CoS value.Related Syntax:# voice-vlan cos <0-7> remark
voice-vlan oui-table	Add or remove the selected OUI to/ from the OUI table. In default, there are 8 OUI addresses.- Enter the OUI address.- Enter a brief description for the specified MAC address to the voice VLAN OUI table.Related Syntax:# voice-vlan cos <0-7> remark
voice-vlan vlan Set the VLAN	identifier of the voice VLAN.<2-4094> - Enter the number of VLAN ID.Related Syntax:# voice-vlan vlan <2-4094>

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)# voice-vlan aging-time 1000
P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# voice-vlan oui-table 22:30:ff test_01 

P2100(config)#
P2100(config)# voice-vlan oui-table 00:01:E2 STAMP
P2100(config)# exit
P2100# show voice-vlan interfaces gigabitEthernet 1
Voice VLAN Aging : 1000 minutes
Voice VLAN CoS : 6
Voice VLAN 1p Remark: disabled

OUI table
OUI MAC | Description
----+----
00:E0:BB | 3COM
00:03:6B | Cisco
00:E0:75 | Veritel
00:D0:1E | Pingtel
00:01:E3 | Siemens
00:60:B9 | NEC/Philips
00:0F:E2 | H3C
00:09:6E | Avaya
22:30:FF | test_01
00:01:E2 | STAMP

Port | State | Port Mode | Cos Mode
----+----+----+
gil | Disabled | Auto | Src
P2100# 

Telnet Command: webhook

Use this command to enable or disable the webhook service.

Syntax Items

webhook active

webhook host

webhook interval

webhook keep

Description

Syntax Items Description
webhook active- Enable or disable the webhook application.Related Syntax:# webhook active
webhook host	Specify the destination (URL, domain name, IP address) to receive the data transferred by VigorSwitch.ip- Enter the IP address of the destination.path- Enter the path string (part of the composition of the URL) of the destination.port- Enter a port number.service-Specify the protocol (http or https) of the destination.url- Enter the domain name (e.g., draytek.com) of the destination. Note that it is not necessary to enter this information if IP address has been set first.Related Syntax:# webhook host ip# webhook host path# webhook host port●# webhook host service●# webhook host url
webhook interval <1-60> - Set	the transmission interval (unit is minute).Related Syntax:●# webhook interval <1-60>
webhook keep	settings- Enable or disable the function of keep webhook settings.Related Syntax:●# webhook keep settings

Example

P2100# configure
P2100(config)# webhook host service https
P2100(config)# webhook host url www.demo.com
P2100(config)# webhook host path Draytek/demo
P2100(config)# webhook host port 443
P2100(config)# webhook interval 2 

XIII-2-4 Copy Configuration

Use this command to upgrade firmware image, configuration file, syslog file, language file and security certificate.

Syntax Items

copy flash://

copy tftp://

copy backup-config

copy running-config

copy startup-config

Description

Syntax Items Description
copy flash://	Related Syntax:# copy flash:// flash://# copy flash:// tftp://
copy running-config	startup-config - Copy the running configuration file to startup configuration.tftp:// - Copy the running configuration file to remote TFTP server with a filename.- Enter the IP address of TFTP sever.- Create a name to save the configuration file.Related Syntax:# copy running-config backup-config# copy running-config startup-config# copy running-config tftp://
copy startup-config	running-config - Copy the startup configuration file to the running configuration.tftp:// - Copy the startup configuration file to remote TFTP server with a filename.- Enter the IP address of TFTP sever.- Create a name to save the configuration file.Related Syntax:# copy startup-config backup-config# copy startup-config running-config# copy startup-config tftp://
copy tftp://	Backup-config - Get the backup configuration from specified TFTP server.running-config - Get the running configuration from specified TFTP server.startup-config - Get the startup configuration from specified TFTP server.Related Syntax:# copy tftp:// backup-config# copy tftp:// flash://# copy tftp:// running-config# copy tftp:// startup-config

- # copy tftp:// tftp://

Example

P2100# copy running-config tftp://172.16.3.8/test_carrie.cfg
Uploading file. Please wait...
Save configuration done.
P2100# copy startup-config tftp://172.16.3.8/test_da.cfg
Uploading file. Please wait...
Save configuration done.
P2100# 

XIII-2-5 Delete Configuration

Use this command to delete a file from the FLASH file system or restore the factory default settings of VigorSwitch.

Syntax Items

delete backup-config

delete flash:// startup-config

delete startup-config

delete system

Description

Syntax Items Description
delete backup-config	Delete the backup configuration file in FLASH file system.Related Syntax:# delete backup-config
deleteflash://startup-config	Delete the startup configuration file in FLASH file system.Related Syntax:# delete flash://startup-config
delete startup-config Restore	the factory default settings of VigorSwitch.Related Syntax:# delete startup-config
delete system Delete the firmware image0/image1 stored in FLASH file system.-Related Syntax:# delete system

Example

P2100# delet flash://startup-config
Delete flash://startup-config [y/n] y
Do you want to reload the system to take effect? [y/n] y 

...

XII-2-6 Disable Configuration

All commands used will be divided into EXEC mode and Privileged EXEC mode. This command is to turn off privileged mode command.

Default privilege level is 15 if no privilege level is specified on enable command.

Default privilege level is 1 if no privilege level is specified on disable command.

Syntax Items

disable

Description

Syntax Items Description
disable	<1-14> - Enter a number to specify the privilege level.Related Syntax:● # disable <1-14>

Example

P2100# disable ?<1-14> Privilege level<cr>P2100# disable 3P2100#

XI II-2-7 End Configuration

Use this command to end current mode.

Syntax Items

end

Example

P2100(config)# interface GigabitEthernet 3

P2100(config-if)# end

P2100#

XI II-2-8 Exit Configuration

Use this command to close current CLI session or return to previous mode.

Syntax Items

exit

Example

P2100(config)# interface GigabitEthernet 3
P2100(config-if)# exit
P2100(config)# 

XIII-2-9 Hardware-Monitor Configuration

Use this command to execute the hardware fan test.

Syntax Items

hardware-monitor fan-test

Example

P2100# hardware-monitor fan-test
P2100# 

XII-2-10 Ping Configuration

Use this command to send ICMP ECHO_REQUEST to network hosts.

Syntax Items

ping

Description

Syntax Items Description
ping	- Enter an IPv4/ IPv6 address or a domain name to ping.count <1-999999999>- Specify the number of repetitions of ping operation.Related Syntax:● # pingcount <1-999999999>

Example

P2100# ping 192.168.1.11 count 3
PING 192.168.1.11 (192.168.1.11): 56 data bytes
64 bytes from 192.168.1.11: icmp_seq=0 ttl=64 time=0.0 ms
64 bytes from 192.168.1.11: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.0 ms
64 bytes from 192.168.1.11: icmp_seq=2 ttl=64 time=0.0 ms

--- 192.168.1.11 ping statistics ---
3 packets transmitted, 3 packets received, 0% packet loss 

round-trip min/avg/max = 0.0/0.0/0.0 ms
P2100# 

XIII-2-11 Reboot Configuration

Use this command to perform a cold restart of VigorSwitch.

Syntax Items

reboot

Example

P2100# reboot
P2100# 

XII-2-12 Renew Configuration

Use this command to renew DHCP Snooping database from backup file.

Syntax Items

renew ip dhcp snooping database

Example

P2100# renew ip dhcp snooping database
P2100# 

XII-2-13 Restore-defaults Configuration

Use this command to restore the factory default settings for the system or for the selected port.

Syntax Items

restore-default

Description

Syntax Items Description
restore-default <1-10> - Enter	the number (1 to 10) of LAN port.<1-8> - Enter the number of LAG port.Related Syntax:# restore-default# restore-default interfaces GigabitEthernet <1-10># restore-default interfaces LAG <1-8>

Example

P2100# restore-defaults interfaces gigabitethernet 3 Interface gi3: restore factory defaults. 

P2100#
P2100# restore-default
System: restore factory defaults. Do you want to reboot now? (y/n)y 

XII-2-14 Save Configuration

Use this command to save configuration and activate the settings.

Note that this command has the same effect as "copy running-config startup-config".

Syntax Items

save

Example

P2100# save
Success
P2100# 

XII-2-15 Show Configuration

After finished the command setting, use this command to display the configuration for all commands.

Syntax Items

show

Example

P2100# show acl utilization
Type: sys usage: 256
Type: IPSG usage: 128
Type: Auth usage: 128
Type: (null) usage: 128
Type: (null) usage: 128
P2100#
P2100# show arp
Address HWtype HWaddress Flags Mask Iface
192.168.1.9 ether 60:A4:4C:E6:5A:4F C eth0
192.168.1.1 ether 00:1D:AA:6D:D1:18 C eth0 P2100#
P2100# 

XII-2-16 SSL Configuration

Use this command to generate security certificate files such as RSA, DSA.

After entering the command of SSL, follow the onscreen questions to give the required

information.

Syntax Items

ssl

Example

P2100# ssl
Generating a 1024 bit RSA private key
)++++++
)++++++
writing new private key to '/mnt/ssh/ssl_key.pem_tmp'
----
You are about to be asked to enter information that will be incorporated into your certificate request.
What you are about to enter is what is called a Distinguished Name or a D There are quite a few fields but you can leave some blank
For some fields there will be a default value,
If you enter '.', the field will be left blank.
----
Country Name (2 letter code) [AU]:tw
State or Province Name (full name) [Some-State]:hs
Locality Name (eg, city) []:hschu
Organization Name (eg, company) [Internet Widgits Pty Ltd]:draytek
Organizational Unit Name (eg, section) []:marketing
Common Name (e.g. server FQDN or YOUR name) []:draytek
Email Address []:[e-mail]
P2100# 

XII-2-17 Terminal Configuration

Use this command to set the maximum line number that the terminal is able to print.

Syntax Items

terminal

Syntax Description

Syntax Items Description
terminal <0-24> - Enter the length value. 0 means no limit.
	Related Syntax:● # terminal length <0-24>

Example

P2100# terminal length 15
P2100# show running-config
..... 

XII-2-18 Traceroute Configuration

Use this command to execute network trace route diagnostic.

Syntax Items

traceroute

Syntax Description

Syntax Items Description
traceroute	- Enter the IP address or the hostname of the device for VigorSwitch to perform traceroute diagnostic.Related Syntax:● # traceroute

Example

P2100# traceroute 192.168.1.224
traceroute to 192.168.1.224 (192.168.1.224), 30 hops max, 40 byte packets
1 192.168.1.224 (192.168.1.224) 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms
P2100# 

XII-2-19 UDLD Configuration

Use this command to reset all interfaces disabled by the UniDirectional Link Detection (UDLD) and make data traffic begin passing through the interfaces again.

Syntax Items

udld

Syntax Description

Syntax Items Description
udld	Reset all the interfaces which have been shut down by UDLD.Related Syntax:# udld reset

Example

P2100# udld reset

P2100#

This page is left blank.

Appendix: Reference

This chapter will tell you the basic concept of features to manage this switch and how they work.

A-1 What's the Ethernet

Ethernet originated and was implemented at Xerox in Palo Alto, CA in 1973 and was successfully commercialized by Digital Equipment Corporation (DEC), Intel and Xerox (DIX) in 1980. In 1992, Grand Junction Networks unveiled a new high speed Ethernet with the same characteristic of the original Ethernet but operated at 100Mbps, called Fast Ethernet now. This means Fast Ethernet inherits the same frame format, CSMA/CD, software interface. In 1998, Gigabit Ethernet was rolled out and provided 1000Mbps. Now 10G/s Ethernet is under approving. Although these Ethernet have different speed, they still use the same basic functions. So they are compatible in software and can connect each other almost without limitation. The transmission media may be the only problem.

graph TD
    A["Application"] --> B["Presentation"]
    B --> C["Session"]
    C --> D["Transport"]
    D --> E["Network"]
    E --> F["Data link"]
    F --> G["Physical"]

    H["Upper-layer protocols"] --> I["MAC-client"]
    I --> J["Media Access (MAC)"]
    J --> K["Physical (PHY)"]

    L["IEEE 802-specific"] --> M["IEEE 802.3-specific"]
    M --> N["Media-specific"]

In the above figure, we can see that Ethernet locates at the Data Link layer and Physical layer and comprises three portions, including logical link control (LLC), media access control (MAC), and physical layer. The first two comprises Data link layer, which performs splitting data into frame for transmitting, receiving acknowledge frame, error checking and re-transmitting when not received correctly as well as provides an error-free channel upward to network layer.

graph TD
    A["IEEE 802.2 LLC"] --> B["IEEE802.3 CSMA/CD MAC"]
    B --> C["IEEE 802.3 PLS"]
    B --> D["CS"]
    C --> E["IEEE 802.3 MAU"]
    D --> F["ANSI X3T9.5 PMD"]
    E --> G["Coaxial/STP/UTP"]
    F --> H["Fiber"]
    I["Data Link Layer"] --> A
    J["Physical Layer"] --> C
    K["MII"] --> F

This above diagram shows the Ethernet architecture, LLC sub-layer and MAC sub-layer, which are responded to the Data Link layer, and transceivers, which are responded to the Physical layer in OSI model. In this section, we are mainly describing the MAC sub-layer.

Logical Link Control (LLC)

Data link layer is composed of both the sub-layers of MAC and MAC-client. Here MAC client may be logical link control or bridge relay entity.

Logical link control supports the interface between the Ethernet MAC and upper layers in the protocol stack, usually Network layer, which is nothing to do with the nature of the LAN. So it can operate over other different LAN technology such as Token Ring, FDDI and so on. Likewise, for the interface to the MAC layer, LLC defines the services with the interface independent of the medium access technology and with some of the nature of the medium itself.

DSAP address	SSAP address	Control	Information
8 bits	8 bits	8 or 16 bits	M*8 bits

DSAP address	=	Destination service access point address field
SSAP address	=	Source service access point address field
Control	=	Control field [16 bits for formats that include sequence numbering, and 8 bits for formats that do rot (see 5.2)]
Information	=	Information field
*	=	Multiplication
M	=	An integer value equal to or greater than 0. (Upper bound of M is a function of the medium access control methodology used.)

The table above is the format of LLC PDU. It comprises four fields, DSAP, SSAP, Control and Information. The DSAP address field identifies the one or more service access points, in which the I/G bit indicates it is individual or group address. If all bit of DSAP is 1s, it's a global address. The SSAP address field identifies the specific services indicated by C/R bit (command or response). The DSAP and SSAP pair with some reserved values indicates some well-known services listed in the table below.

0xAAAA	SNAP
0xE0E0	Novell IPX
0xF0F0	NetBios
0xFEFE	IOS network layer PDU
0xFFFF	Novell IPX 802.3 RAW packet
0x4242	STP BPDU
0x0606	IP
0x9898	ARP

LLC type 1 connectionless service, LLC type 2 connection-oriented service and LLC type 3 acknowledge connectionless service are three types of LLC frame for all classes of service. In Fig 3-2, it shows the format of Service Access Point (SAP). Please refer to IEEE802.2 for more details.

A-2 Media Access Control (MAC)

MAC Addressing

Because LAN is composed of many nodes, for the data exchanged among these nodes, each node must have its own unique address to identify who should send the data or should receive the data. In OSI model, each layer provides its own mean to identify the unique address in some form, for example, IP address in network layer.

The MAC is belonged to Data Link Layer (Layer 2), the address is defined to be a 48-bit long and locally unique address. Since this type of address is applied only to the Ethernet LAN media access control (MAC), they are referred to as MAC addresses.

The first three bytes are Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI) code assigned by IEEE. The last three bytes are the serial number assigned by the vendor of the network device. All these six bytes are stored in a non-volatile memory in the device. Their format is as the following table and normally written in the form as aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff, a 12 hexadecimal digits separated by hyphens, in which the aa-bb-cc is the OUI code and the dd-ee-ff is the serial number assigned by manufacturer.

Bit 47 Bit 0

The first bit of the first byte in the Destination address (DA) determines the address to be a Unicast (0) or Multicast frame (1), known as I/G bit indicating individual (0) or group (1). So the 48-bit address space is divided into two portions, Unicast and Multicast. The second bit is for global-unique (0) or locally-unique address. The former is assigned by the device manufacturer, and the later is usually assigned by the administrator. In practice, global-unique addresses are always applied.

A unicast address is identified with a single network interface. With this nature of MAC address, a frame transmitted can exactly be received by the target an interface the destination MAC points to.

A multicast address is identified with a group of network devices or network interfaces. In Ethernet, a many-to-many connectivity in the LANs is provided. It provides a mean to send a frame to many network devices at a time. When all bit of DA is 1s, it is a broadcast, which means all network device except the sender itself can receive the frame and response.

Ethernet Frame Format

There are two major forms of Ethernet frame, type encapsulation and length encapsulation, both of which are categorized as four frame formats 802.3/802.2 SNAP, 802.3/802.2, Ethernet II and Netware 802.3 RAW. We will introduce the basic Ethernet frame format defined by the IEEE 802.3 standard required for all MAC implementations. It contains seven fields explained below.

PRE SFD DA SA Type/Length Data Pad bit if any FCS

7 7 6 6 2 46-1500

4

Preamble (PRE) - The PRE is 7-byte long with alternating pattern of ones and zeros used to tell the receiving node that a frame is coming, and to synchronize the physical receiver with the incoming bit stream. The preamble pattern is:

10101010 10101010 10101010 10101010 10101010 10101010 10101010 10101010

Start-of-frame delimiter (SFD) - The SFD is one-byte long with alternating pattern of ones and zeros, ending with two consecutive 1-bits. It immediately follows the preamble and uses the last two consecutive 1s bit to indicate that the next bit is the start of the data packet and the left-most bit in the left-most byte of the destination address. The SFD pattern is 10101011.

Destination address (DA) - The DA field is used to identify which network device(s) should receive the packet. It is a unique address. Please see the section of MAC addressing.

Source addresses (SA) - The SA field indicates the source node. The SA is always an individual address and the left-most bit in the SA field is always 0.

Length/Type - This field indicates either the number of the data bytes contained in the data field of the frame, or the Ethernet type of data. If the value of first two bytes is less than or equal to 1500 in decimal, the number of bytes in the data field is equal to the Length/ Type value, i.e. this field acts as Length indicator at this moment. When this field acts as Length, the frame has optional fields for 802.3/ 802.2 SNAP encapsulation, 802.3/ 802.2 encapsulation and Netware 802.3 RAW encapsulation. Each of them has different fields following the Length field.

If the Length/ Type value is greater than 1500, it means the Length/ Type acts as Type. Different type value means the frames with different protocols running over Ethernet being sent or received.

For example,

0x0800	IP datagram
0x0806	ARP
0x0835	RARP
0x8137	IPX datagram
0x86DD	IPv6

Data - Less than or equal to 1500 bytes and greater or equal to 46 bytes. If data is less than 46 bytes, the MAC will automatically extend the padding bits and have the payload be equal to 46 bytes. The length of data field must equal the value of the Length field when the Length/ Type acts as Length.

Frame check sequence (FCS) - This field contains a 32-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC) value, and is a check sum computed with DA, SA, through the end of the data field with the following polynomial.

$$ \mathrm{G} (x) = x ^ {3 2} + x ^ {2 6} + x ^ {2 3} + x ^ {2 2} + x ^ {1 6} + x ^ {1 2} + x ^ {1 1} + x ^ {1 0} + x ^ {8} + x ^ {7} + x ^ {5} + x ^ {4} + x ^ {2} + x + 1 $$

It is created by the sending MAC and recalculated by the receiving MAC to check if the packet is damaged or not.

How does a MAC work?

The MAC sub-layer has two primary jobs to do:

1. Receiving and transmitting data. When receiving data, it parses frame to detect error; when transmitting data, it performs frame assembly.
2. Performing Media access control. It prepares the initiation jobs for a frame transmission and makes recovery from transmission failure.

Frame transmission

As Ethernet adopted Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detect (CSMA/ CD), it detects if there is any carrier signal from another network device running over the physical medium when a frame is ready for transmission. This is referred to as sensing carrier, also "Listen". If

there is signal on the medium, the MAC defers the traffic to avoid a transmission collision and waits for a random period of time, called backoff time, then sends the traffic again.

After the frame is assembled, when transmitting the frame, the preamble (PRE) bytes are inserted and sent first, then the next, Start of frame Delimiter (SFD), DA, SA and through the data field and FCS field in turn. The followings summarize what a MAC does before transmitting a frame.

1. MAC will assemble the frame. First, the preamble and Start-of-Frame delimiter will be put in the fields of PRE and SFD, followed DA, SA, tag ID if tagged VLAN is applied, Ethertype or the value of the data length, and payload data field, and finally put the FCS data in order into the responded fields.
2. Listen if there is any traffic running over the medium. If yes, wait.
3. If the medium is quiet, and no longer senses any carrier, the MAC waits for a period of time, i.e. inter-frame gap time to have the MAC ready with enough time and then start transmitting the frame.
4. During the transmission, MAC keeps monitoring the status of the medium. If no collision happens until the end of the frame, it transmits successfully. If there is a collision happened, the MAC will send the patterned jamming bit to guarantee the collision event propagated to all involved network devices, then wait for a random period of time, i.e. backoff time. When backoff time expires, the MAC goes back to the beginning state and attempts to transmit again. After a collision happens, MAC increases the transmission attempts. If the count of the transmission attempt reaches 16 times, the frame in MAC's queue will be discarded.

Ethernet MAC transmits frames in half-duplex and full-duplex ways. In halfduplex operation mode, the MAC can either transmit or receive frame at a moment, but cannot do both jobs at the same time.

As the transmission of a MAC frame with the half-duplex operation exists only in the same collision domain, the carrier signal needs to spend time to travel to reach the targeted device. For two most-distant devices in the same collision domain, when one sends the frame first, and the second sends the frame, in worstcase, just before the frame from the first device arrives. The collision happens and will be detected by the second device immediately. Because of the medium delay, this corrupted signal needs to spend some time to propagate back to the first device. The maximum time to detect a collision is approximately twice the signal propagation time between the two most-distant devices. This maximum time is traded-off by the collision recovery time and the diameter of the LAN.

In the original 802.3 specification, Ethernet operates in half duplex only. Under this condition, when in 10Mbps LAN, it's 2500 meters, in 100Mbps LAN, it's approximately 200 meters and in 1000Mbps, 200 meters. According to the theory, it should be 20 meters. But it's not practical, so the LAN diameter is kept by using to increase the minimum frame size with a variable-length non-data extension bit field which is removed at the receiving MAC. The following tables are the frame format suitable for 10M, 100M and 1000M Ethernet, and some parameter values that shall be applied to all of these three types of Ethernet.

Actually, the practice Gigabit Ethernet chips do not feature this so far. They all have their chips supported full-duplex mode only, as well as all network vendors' devices. So this criterion should not exist at the present time and in the future. The switch's Gigabit module supports only full-duplex mode.

Parameter value/LAN	10Base	100Base	1000Base
Max. collision domain DTE to DTE	100 meters 100 meters for UTP412 meters for fiber	100 meters for UTP316 meters for fiber
Max. collision domain with repeater	2500 meters 205 meters 200 meters
Slot time	512 bit times 512 bit times 512 bit times
Interframe Gap	9.6us	0.96us	0.096us
AttemptLimit	16	16	16
BackoffLimit	10	10	10
JamSize	32 bits 32 bits 32 bits
MaxFrameSize	1518	1518	1518
MinFrameSize	64	64	64
BurstLimit	Not applicable Not applicable 65536 bits

In full-duplex operation mode, both transmitting and receiving frames are processed simultaneously. This doubles the total bandwidth. Full duplex is much easier than half duplex because it does not involve media contention, collision, retransmission schedule, padding bits for short frame. The rest functions follow the specification of IEEE802.3. For example, it must meet the requirement of minimum inter-frame gap between successive frames and frame format the same as that in the half-duplex operation.

Because no collision will happen in full-duplex operation, for sure, there is no mechanism to tell all the involved devices. What will it be if receiving device is busy and a frame is coming at the same time? Can it use “backpressure” to tell the source device? A function flow control is introduced in the full-duplex operation.

A-3 Flow Control

Flow control is a mechanism to tell the source device stopping sending frame for a specified period of time designated by target device until the PAUSE time expires. This is accomplished by sending a PAUSE frame from target device to source device. When the target is not busy and the PAUSE time is expired, it will send another PAUSE frame with zero time-to-wait to source device. After the source device receives the PAUSE frame, it will again transmit frames immediately. PAUSE frame is identical in the form of the MAC frame with a pause-time value and with a special destination MAC address 01-80-C2-00-00-01. As per the specification, PAUSE operation can not be used to inhibit the transmission of MAC control frame.

Normally, in 10Mbps and 100Mbps Ethernet, only symmetric flow control is supported. However, some switches (e.g. 24-Port GbE Web Smart Switch) support not only symmetric but asymmetric flow controls for the special application. In Gigabit Ethernet, both symmetric flow control and asymmetric flow control are supported. Asymmetric flow control only allows transmitting PAUSE frame in one way from one side, the other side is not but receipt-and-discard the flow control information. Symmetric flow control allows both two ports to transmit PASUE frames each other simultaneously.

Inter-frame Gap time

After the end of a transmission, if a network node is ready to transmit data out and if there is no carrier signal on the medium at that time, the device will wait for a period of time known as an inter-frame gap time to have the medium clear and stabilized as well as to have the jobs ready, such as adjusting buffer counter, updating counter and so on, in the receiver site. Once the inter-frame gap time expires after the de-assertion of carrier sense, the MAC transmits data. In IEEE802.3 specification, this is 96-bit time or more.

Collision

Collision happens only in half-duplex operation. When two or more network nodes transmit frames at approximately the same time, a collision always occurs and interferes with each other. This results the carrier signal distorted and undiscriminated. MAC can afford detecting, through the physical layer, the distortion of the carrier signal. When a collision is detected during a frame transmission, the transmission will not stop immediately but, instead, continues transmitting until the rest bits specified by jamSize are completely transmitted. This guarantees the duration of collision is enough to have all involved devices able to detect the collision. This is referred to as Jamming. After jamming pattern is sent, MAC stops transmitting the rest data queued in the buffer and waits for a random period of time, known as backoff time with the following formula. When backoff time expires, the device goes back to the state of attempting to transmit frame. The backoff time is determined by the formula below. When the times of collision is increased, the backoff time is getting long until the collision times excess 16. If this happens, the frame will be discarded and backoff time will also be reset.

$$ 0 \leq r < 2 ^ {k} $$

where

$$ k = \min (n, 1 0) $$

Frame Reception

In essence, the frame reception is the same in both operations of half duplex and full duplex, except that full-duplex operation uses two buffers to transmit and receive the frame independently. The receiving node always “listens” if there is traffic running over the medium when it is not receiving a frame. When a frame destined for the target device comes,

the receiver of the target device begins receiving the bit stream, and looks for the PRE (Preamble) pattern and Start-of-Frame Delimiter (SFD) that indicates the next bit is the starting point of the MAC frame until all bit of the frame is received.

For a received frame, the MAC will check:

1. If it is less than one slotTime in length, i.e. short packet, and if yes, it will be discarded by MAC because, by definition, the valid frame must be longer than the slotTime. If the length of the frame is less than one slotTime, it means there may be a collision happened somewhere or an interface malfunctioned in the LAN. When detecting the case, the MAC drops the packet and goes back to the ready state.
2. If the DA of the received frame exactly matches the physical address that the receiving MAC owns or the multicast address designated to recognize. If not, discards it and the MAC passes the frame to its client and goes back to the ready state.
3. If the frame is too long. If yes, throws it away and reports frame Too Long.
4. If the FCS of the received frame is valid. If not, for 10M and 100M Ethernet, discards the frame. For Gigabit Ethernet or higher speed Ethernet, MAC has to check one more field, i.e. extra bit field, if FCS is invalid. If there is any extra bits existed, which must meet the specification of IEEE802.3. When both FCS and extra bits are valid, the received frame will be accepted, otherwise discards the received frame and reports frameCheckError if no extra bits appended or alignmentError if extra bits appended.
5. If the length/ type is valid. If not, discards the packet and reports lengthError.
6. If all five procedures above are ok, then the MAC treats the frame as good and de-assembles the frame.

What if a VLAN tagging is applied?

VLAN tagging is a 4-byte long data immediately following the MAC source address. When tagged VLAN is applied, the Ethernet frame structure will have a little change shown as follows.

Pre

SFD

DA

SA

VLAN type ID

Tag control information

Length/ type

Data

Pad

FCS

Ext

Only two fields, VLAN ID and Tag control information are different in comparison with the basic Ethernet frame. The rest fields are the same.

The first two bytes is VLAN type ID with the value of 0x8100 indicating the received frame is tagged VLAN and the next two bytes are Tag Control Information (TCI) used to provide user priority and VLAN ID, which are explained respectively in the following table.

Bits 15-13	User Priority 7-0, 0 is lowest priority
Bit 12	CFI (Canonical Format Indicator)1: RIF field is present in the tag header0: No RIF field is present
Bits 11-0	VID (VLAN Identifier)0x000: Null VID. No VID is present and only user priority is present.0x001: Default VID0xFFFF: Reserved

Note: RIF is used in Token Ring network to provide source routing and comprises two fields, Routing Control and Route Descriptor.

When MAC parses the received frame and finds a reserved special value 0x8100 at the location of the Length/ Type field of the normal non-VLAN frame, it will interpret the received frame as a tagged VLAN frame. If this happens in a switch, the MAC will forward it, according to its priority and egress rule, to all the ports that is associated with that VID. If it happens in a

network interface card, MAC will deprive of the tag header and process it in the same way as a basic normal frame. For a VLAN-enabled LAN, all involved devices must be equipped with VLAN optional function.

At operating speeds above 100 Mbps, the slotTime employed at slower speeds is inadequate to accommodate network topologies of the desired physical extent. Carrier Extension provides a means by which the slotTime can be increased to a sufficient value for the desired topologies, without increasing the minFrameSize parameter, as this would have deleterious effects. Nondata bits, referred to as extension bits, are appended to frames that are less than slotTime bits in length so that the resulting transmission is at least one slotTime in duration. Carrier Extension can be performed only if the underlying physical layer is capable of sending and receiving symbols that are readily distinguished from data symbols, as is the case in most physical layers that use a block encoding/ decoding scheme.

The maximum length of the extension is equal to the quantity (slotTime - minFrameSize). The MAC continues to monitor the medium for collisions while it is transmitting extension bits, and it will treat any collision that occurs after the threshold (slotTime) as a late collision.